CLSOperator's Manual

Order no. P218 0116 13 Part no. 218 584 87 02 Edition 2016-1

É2185848702ÀËÍ2185848702

CLSO

perat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstra e 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth SIG Inc.RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-istered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-son Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarksof Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of HarmanInternational Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in successionindicate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells youwhere you can findmore information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on the nextpage.

Dis‐play This text indicates a message on themultifunction display/multimedia dis-play.

As at 10.09.2015

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-cle before driving. For your own safety and alonger vehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this Operator's Manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:RDigital Operator's ManualRPrinted Operator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.Your Operator's Manual:

Digital form inside the vehicleThe Digital Operator's Manual providescomprehensive and specifically adaptedinformation on your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia system. It contains infor-mative animations, individual languagesettings and an intuitive search function.Booklet inside the vehicleIn addition to this manual and the afore-mentioned digital media, you also have theoption to obtain a comprehensive printedversion of the Supplement for your multi-media system from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the InternetTheOperator'sManual on the Internet pro-vides easy access to all informationregarding your vehicle andmultimedia sys-tem. It also provides helpful animations,interesting background information and awide array of search options.Digital form as an AppUsing the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, youcan view all the information on your vehicleandmultimedia system via mobile Internetor download it independently of networkaccess. Available for smartphones or tab-lets.

Please note that theMercedes-Benz Guides Appmay not yet be available in your country.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2185848702 É2185848702ÀËÍ

Welcome to the world ofMercedes-Benz ...................................... 1

Index ....................................................... 4

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 24Introduction ........................................... 24Operation ............................................... 24

Introduction ......................................... 25Protection of the environment ............... 25Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 25Operator's Manual ................................. 26Service and vehicle operation ................ 26Operating safety .................................... 28QR codes for the rescue card ................ 30Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 30Information on copyright ....................... 32

At a glance ........................................... 33Cockpit .................................................. 33Instrument cluster ................................. 34Multifunction steering wheel ................. 35Center console ...................................... 36Overhead control panel ......................... 39Door control panel ................................. 40

Safety ................................................... 41Panic alarm ............................................ 41Occupant safety .................................... 41Children in the vehicle ........................... 58Pets in the vehicle ................................. 63Driving safety systems ........................... 64Protection against theft ......................... 74

Opening and closing ........................... 76SmartKey ............................................... 76Doors ..................................................... 81Trunk ..................................................... 83Side windows ......................................... 87Sliding sunroof ....................................... 90

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 93Correct driver's seat position ................ 93Seats ..................................................... 93Steering wheel ....................................... 98Mirrors ................................................. 101Memory function ................................. 103

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 105Exterior lighting ................................... 105Interior lighting .................................... 108Replacing bulbs ................................... 109Windshield wipers ................................ 109

Climate control ................................. 112Overview of climate control systems ... 112Operating the climate control sys-tems .................................................... 116Air vents .............................................. 121

Driving and parking .......................... 122Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 122Driving ................................................. 122Automatic transmission ....................... 129Refueling ............................................. 138Parking ................................................ 141Driving tips .......................................... 143Driving systems ................................... 147

On-board computer and displays .... 188Important safety notes ........................ 188Displays and operation ........................ 188Menus and submenus ......................... 190Display messages ................................ 203Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................... 226

Multimedia system ........................... 236General notes ...................................... 236Important safety notes ........................ 236Function restrictions ............................ 236Operating system ................................ 237

Stowage and features ...................... 242Stowage areas ..................................... 242

2 Contents

Features .............................................. 248

Maintenance and care ...................... 265Engine compartment ........................... 265Maintenance ........................................ 269Care ..................................................... 270

Breakdown assistance ..................... 277Where will I find...? .............................. 277Flat tire ................................................ 278Battery (vehicle) .................................. 282Jump-starting ....................................... 285Towing and tow-starting ...................... 287Fuses ................................................... 290

Wheels and tires ............................... 292Important safety notes ........................ 292Operation ............................................ 292Winter operation .................................. 294Tire pressure ....................................... 295Loading the vehicle .............................. 302All about wheels and tires ................... 305Changing a wheel ................................ 312Wheel and tire combinations ............... 317Emergency spare wheel ....................... 317

Technical data ................................... 321Information regarding technical data ... 321Vehicle electronics .............................. 321Identification plates ............................. 322Service products and filling capaci-ties ...................................................... 323Vehicle data ......................................... 328

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATIC (permanent all-wheeldrive)

Function/notes ............................. 16312 V socket

see Sockets360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 274Display in the multimedia system .. 175Function/notes ............................. 173

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 204Function/notes ................................ 64Important safety notes .................... 64Warning lamp ................................. 229

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 58

Activating media modeGeneral notes ................................ 241

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 116Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 196Display message ............................ 217Function/information .................... 182

Active Driving Assistance package .. 182Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 197Display message ............................ 217Function/information .................... 184

Active multicontour seatAdjusting (on the seat) ..................... 97

Active Parking AssistDetecting parking spaces .............. 166Display message ............................ 217Exiting a parking space .................. 168Function/notes ............................. 165Important safety notes .................. 165

Parking .......................................... 167ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 68Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 160Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 212Function/notes ............................. 107Switching on/off ........................... 108

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 326Address book

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Adjusting the volumeAudio 20 ........................................ 237COMAND ....................................... 237

Air bagsDeployment ..................................... 53Display message ............................ 210Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 47Important safety notes .................... 46Introduction ..................................... 46Knee bag .......................................... 47Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 49PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 42Pelvis air bag ................................... 48Side impact air bag .......................... 47Window curtain air bag .................... 49

AIR FLOW ........................................... 117Air vents

Glove box ....................................... 121Important safety notes .................. 121Rear ............................................... 121Setting ........................................... 121Setting the center air vents ........... 121Setting the side air vents ............... 121

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIRMATICDisplay message ............................ 215Function/notes ............................. 159

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75Switching off (ATA) .......................... 75

4 Index

Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 75

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 198Setting the color (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 198

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ................................................ 161Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Ashtray ............................................... 252Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 195Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 195ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 270Hiding a service message .............. 269Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 270Service message ............................ 269Special service requirements ......... 270

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 75Function ........................................... 75Switching off the alarm .................... 75

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 196Display message ............................ 215Function/notes ............................. 177

Audio 20Switching on/off ........................... 237

Audio systemsee separate operating instructions

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 212see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 270

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 127Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 126Automatic headlamp mode .............. 105Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 133Automatic drive program ............... 135Changing gear ............................... 133DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 130Display message ............................ 223Drive program display .................... 130Driving tips .................................... 133Emergency running mode .............. 138Engaging drive position .................. 132Engaging neutral ............................ 131Engaging park position(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 130Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 131Engaging reverse gear ................... 131Engaging the park position ............ 131Kickdown ....................................... 133Manual drive program .................... 135Manual drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................................ 136Manual drive program (vehicleswith Sports package AMG) ............ 136Overview ........................................ 129Problem (malfunction) ................... 138Program selector button ................ 133Pulling away ................................... 125Selector lever ................................ 129Starting the engine ........................ 125Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 135Transmission position display ........ 129Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 130Transmission positions .................. 132

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 138

BBack button ....................................... 237BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 65

Index 5

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Function/notes ................................ 65BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist)

Important safety notes .................... 65Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 79Important safety notes .................... 78Replacing ......................................... 79

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 284Display message ............................ 214Important safety notes .................. 282Jump starting ................................. 285

Beltsee Seat belts

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 196Display message ............................ 217Notes/function .............................. 179see Active Blind Spot Assist

Blootooth®Connecting a different mobilephone ............................................ 241

Bluetooth®Searching for a mobile phone ........ 240see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236Telephony ...................................... 239

Box (trunk) ......................................... 246Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 206Notes ............................................. 326

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 212

BrakesABS .................................................. 64Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 68BAS .................................................. 65

BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 65Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 326Display message ............................ 204High-performance brake system .... 146HOLD function ............................... 157Important safety notes .................. 145Maintenance .................................. 145Parking brake ................................ 142Riding tips ...................................... 145Warning lamp ................................. 228

BreakdownWhere will I find...? ........................ 277see Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 34

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 26

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

Care360° camera ................................. 274Car wash ........................................ 270Carpets .......................................... 276Display ........................................... 274Exhaust pipe .................................. 274Exterior lights ................................ 273Interior ........................................... 274Matte finish ................................... 272Notes ............................................. 270Paint .............................................. 272Plastic trim .................................... 275Power washer ................................ 271Rear view camera .......................... 274Roof lining ...................................... 276Seat belt ........................................ 276Seat cover ..................................... 275Selector lever ................................ 275Sensors ......................................... 274Steering wheel ............................... 275Trim pieces .................................... 275

6 Index

Washing by hand ........................... 271Wheels ........................................... 273Windows ........................................ 273Wiper blades .................................. 273Wooden trim .................................. 275

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 246CD

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

CD player (on-board computer) ........ 193Center console

Lower section .................................. 37Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 38Upper section .................................. 36

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 199Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76

ChildRestraint system .............................. 59

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 62LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 60On the front-passenger seat ............ 61Rearward-facing restraint system .... 62Top Tether ....................................... 60

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 62Rear doors ....................................... 63

ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 58

Cigarette lighter ................................ 252Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 274Climate control

Automatic climate control (3-zone) .............................................. 114Controlling automatically ............... 117Cooling with air dehumidification .. 116Defrosting the windows ................. 119Defrosting the windshield .............. 118Dual-zone automatic climate con-trol ................................................. 112General notes ................................ 112Indicator lamp ................................ 117Information about using auto-matic climate control ..................... 115

Maximum cooling .......................... 119Overview of systems ...................... 112Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 120Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 117Rear control panel ......................... 114Refrigerant ..................................... 327Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 328Setting the air distribution ............. 118Setting the air vents ...................... 121Setting the airflow ......................... 118Setting the climate mode (AIRFLOW) ............................................ 117Setting the temperature ................ 117Setting the temperature with 3-zone automatic climate control ..... 117Setting the temperaturewith dual-zone automatic climate control ..... 117Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 120Switching on/off ........................... 116Switching residual heat on/off ...... 120Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 119Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 118

CockpitOverview .......................................... 33see Instrument cluster

Collapsible spare wheelInflating ......................................... 319see Emergency spare wheel

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 196Display message ............................ 206Operation/notes .............................. 67

COMANDSwitching on/off ........................... 237

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 274

Combination switch .......................... 106Connecting a USB device

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 191

Index 7

Controller ........................................... 237Convenience box ............................... 246Convenience closing feature .............. 88Convenience opening feature ............ 88Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 268Display message ............................ 213Filling capacity ............................... 327Important safety notes .................. 326Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201Temperature gauge ........................ 188Warning lamp ................................. 232

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 32Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 212Function/notes ............................. 107

Cruise controlActivation conditions ..................... 148Cruise control lever ....................... 148Deactivating ................................... 149Display message ............................ 220Driving system ............................... 148Function/notes ............................. 148Important safety notes .................. 148Setting a speed .............................. 149Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 148

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 249Center console in the rear com-partment ........................................ 249Important safety notes .................. 248Rear compartment ......................... 249

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 29Customer Relations Department ....... 29

DDashboard

see Instrument clusterData

see Technical dataData carrier

Selecting ........................................ 193

Daytime running lampsDisplay message ............................ 212Function/notes ............................. 105Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 198

Declarations of conformity ................. 28Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 198Interior lighting .............................. 199

Diagnostics connection ...................... 29Digital Operator's Manual

Help ................................................. 24Introduction ..................................... 24

Digital speedometer ......................... 191DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 130Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 269Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 203Driving systems ............................. 215Engine ............................................ 213General notes ................................ 203Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 203KEYLESS-GO .................................. 225Lights ............................................. 212Safety systems .............................. 204SmartKey ....................................... 225Tires ............................................... 221Vehicle ........................................... 223

Distance recorder ............................. 190Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 234Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 68DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 151Activation conditions ..................... 151Deactivating ................................... 155Display message ............................ 218Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 154Function/notes ............................. 149Important safety notes .................. 150Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 153Stopping ........................................ 153

8 Index

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 199Automatic locking (switch) ............... 82Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 76Control panel ................................... 40Display message ............................ 224Emergency locking ........................... 83Emergency unlocking ....................... 83Important safety notes .................... 81Opening (from inside) ...................... 81

Drinking and driving ......................... 143Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 135Display ........................................... 129Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 130Manual ........................................... 135Manual (Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) ............................................... 136Manual (vehicles with Sportspackage AMG) ............................... 136SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 201

Drive program selector ..................... 134Driver's door

see DoorsDriving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 270Driving on flooded roads .................. 147Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 64ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 68BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 65BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 65COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 67Distance warning function ............... 67EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 72ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 69Important safety information ........... 64Overview .......................................... 64PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 72

Driving systemRACE START (Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ........................................ 158

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 173Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 182Active Driving Assistance pack-age ................................................. 182Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 184Active Parking Assist ..................... 165AIRMATIC ...................................... 159AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 161ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 177Blind Spot Assist ............................ 179Cruise control ................................ 148Display message ............................ 215DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 149DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 155HOLD function ............................... 157Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 181Lane Tracking package .................. 179PARKTRONIC ................................. 163Rear view camera .......................... 169Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 178

Driving tipsAMG ceramic brakes ..................... 146Automatic transmission ................. 133Brakes ........................................... 145Break-in period .............................. 122Downhill gradient ........................... 145Drinking and driving ....................... 143Driving in winter ............................. 147Driving on flooded roads ................ 147Driving on wet roads ...................... 147Exhaust check ............................... 144Fuel ................................................ 143General .......................................... 143Hydroplaning ................................. 147Icy road surfaces ........................... 147Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 145Snow chains .................................. 294Wet road surface ........................... 145

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 193

Index 9

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 199Function/notes ............................. 100

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 100Function/notes ............................. 100Switching on/off ........................... 199

EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 246EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 205Function/notes ................................ 72

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 144On-board computer ....................... 191

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 127Automatic engine switch-off .......... 126Deactivating/activating ................. 127General information ....................... 126Important safety notes .................. 126Introduction ................................... 126

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 58

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 83Fuel filler flap ................................. 140Trunk ............................................... 86Vehicle ............................................. 83

Emergency spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 318Important safety notes .................. 317Removing ....................................... 318Storage location ............................ 318Stowing .......................................... 319Technical data ............................... 318

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 53

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 26

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 232Display message ............................ 213ECO start/stop function ................ 126Engine number ............................... 323Irregular running ............................ 128Jump-starting ................................. 285Starting problems .......................... 128Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 125Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 125Switching off .................................. 141Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 290

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 128

Engine jump startingsee Jump starting (engine)

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 267Additives ........................................ 326Checking the oil level ..................... 267Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 267Display message ............................ 214Filling capacity ............................... 326Notes about oil grades ................... 325Notes on oil level/consumption .... 267Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201

Entering an addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 201Characteristics ................................. 70Deactivating/activating (buttonin Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 71Deactivating/activating (exceptMercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 70Deactivating/activating (on-board computer, exceptMercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 195Display message ............................ 204Function/notes ................................ 69General notes .................................. 69Important safety information ........... 69Trailer stabilization ........................... 72

10 Index

Warning lamp ................................. 229ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 69Exhaust check ................................... 144Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 274Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 105see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 101Dipping (automatic) ....................... 102Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 200Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 102Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 101Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 102Setting ........................................... 101Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 104Storing the parking position .......... 102

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 243

FFavorites

Overview ........................................ 238Filler cap

see RefuelingFlat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 278Preparing the vehicle ..................... 278TIREFIT kit ...................................... 279see Emergency spare wheel

Floormats ........................................... 264Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 321Two-way radio ................................ 321

FuelAdditives ........................................ 325Consumption statistics .................. 191Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 191Displaying the range ...................... 191Driving tips .................................... 143Fuel gauge ....................................... 34Grade (gasoline) ............................ 324Important safety notes .................. 324

Notes for CLS 400, CLS 4004MATIC .......................................... 325Problem (malfunction) ................... 140Refueling ........................................ 138Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 324

Fuel filler flapEmergency release ........................ 140Opening ......................................... 139

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 191

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 324Problem (malfunction) ................... 140

Fuse allocation chart (vehicle toolkit) ...................................................... 277Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 290Before changing ............................. 290Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 291Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 291Important safety notes .................. 290

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 263General notes ................................ 261Important safety notes .................. 261Opening/closing the garage door .. 263Problems when programming ........ 263Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 261Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 262

Gasoline ............................................. 324Gear indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 201Genuine parts ...................................... 25Glove box ........................................... 243Google™ Local Search

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

HHandbrake

see Parking brake

Index 11

Hazard warning lamps ...................... 107Head bags

Display message ............................ 209Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 95Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 95Adjusting (rear) ................................ 95Installing/removing (rear) ................ 96Luxury .............................................. 95see NECK-PRO head restraintssee NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

HeadlampsFogging up ..................................... 108see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 106High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 107Display message ............................ 212Switching on/off ........................... 106

Hill start assist .................................. 125HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 158Deactivating ................................... 158Display message ............................ 216Function/notes ............................. 157

Home addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

HoodClosing ........................................... 266Display message ............................ 224Important safety notes .................. 265Opening ......................................... 265

Horn ...................................................... 33Hydroplaning ..................................... 147

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 74Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 234

Indicator lampssee Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Insect protection on the radiator .... 266Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 34Settings ......................................... 197Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 198Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 109Control ........................................... 109Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 199Overview ........................................ 108Reading lamp ................................. 108Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 198Setting the brightness of the dis-play/switch (on-board computer) .. 198Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 198

iPod®see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

JJack

Storage location ............................ 277Using ............................................. 313

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 285

KKey positions

KEYLESS-GO .................................. 123SmartKey ....................................... 123

KEYLESS-GOActivating ......................................... 76Convenience closing feature ............ 89Deactivation ..................................... 76Display message ............................ 225Locking ............................................ 76Removing the Start/Stop button ... 124Start/Stop button .......................... 123Starting the engine ........................ 125Unlocking ......................................... 76

12 Index

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 133Manual drive program .................... 137

Knee bag .............................................. 47

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 197Display message ............................ 217Function/information .................... 181

Lane Tracking package ..................... 179Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 201LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 60License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 212Light function, active

Display message ............................ 212Light sensor (display message) ....... 212Lights

Activating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 199Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 107Automatic headlamp mode ............ 105Cornering light function ................. 107Fogged up headlamps .................... 108General notes ................................ 105Hazard warning lamps ................... 107High beam flasher .......................... 106High-beam headlamps ................... 106Light switch ................................... 105Low-beam headlamps .................... 106Parking lamps ................................ 106Setting exterior lighting ................. 105Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 198Setting the brightness of the dis-play/switch (on-board computer) .. 198Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 198Standing lamps .............................. 106Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 198

Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 198Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 198Turn signals ................................... 106see Interior lighting

Loading guidelines ............................ 242Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 82Emergency locking ........................... 83From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 82

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 199Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 212Switching on/off ........................... 106

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port .................................................. 97

Luxury head restraints ....................... 95

MM+S tires ............................................ 294Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 272mbrace

Call priority .................................... 257Display message ............................ 206Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 257Downloading routes ....................... 260Emergency call .............................. 255General notes ................................ 254Geo fencing ................................... 261Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 259MB info call button ........................ 257Remote fault diagnosis .................. 259Remote vehicle locking .................. 259Roadside Assistance button .......... 256

Index 13

Search & Send ............................... 258Self-test ......................................... 254Speed alert .................................... 260System .......................................... 254Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 261Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 259

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 78General notes .................................. 78Inserting .......................................... 78Locking vehicle ................................ 83Removing ......................................... 78Unlocking the driver's door .............. 83

Media InterfaceUSB port in the armrest of thecenter console ............................... 244see Digital Operator's Manual

Memory card (audio) ......................... 193Memory function ............................... 103Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

360°camera .................................. 173Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 182Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 184Active Parking Assist ..................... 165ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 177Blind Spot Assist ............................ 179Cruise control ................................ 148DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 149DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 155General notes ................................ 147Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 181PARKTRONIC ................................. 163PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 56PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 57Rear view camera .......................... 169Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 178

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 203Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneConnecting (Bluetooth® inter-face) .............................................. 239Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 241Frequencies ................................... 321Installation ..................................... 321Menu (on-board computer) ............ 194Transmission output (maximum) .... 321

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 77MOExtended tires .............................. 278Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 316Mounting a new wheel ................... 315Preparing the vehicle ..................... 313Raising the vehicle ......................... 313Removing a wheel .......................... 315Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 313

MP3Operation ....................................... 193see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Multicontour seatAdjusting (on the seat) ..................... 96

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 190Permanent display ......................... 197

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 189Overview .......................................... 35

Multimedia systemsee Separate operating instructions

Music filessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 192see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

NECK-PRO head restraintsOperation ......................................... 55Resetting triggered .......................... 56

14 Index

NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsImportant safety notes .................... 55Operation ......................................... 55Resetting when triggered ................. 56

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 122

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 49Faults ............................................... 52Operation ......................................... 49System self-test ............................... 51

Occupant safetyAir bags ........................................... 46Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 58Children in the vehicle ..................... 58Important safety notes .................... 41Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 41Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 49PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 42Pets in the vehicle ........................... 63PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 56PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 57Restraint system warning lamp ........ 42Seat belt .......................................... 42

OCSConditions ....................................... 49Faults ............................................... 52Operation ......................................... 49System self-test ............................... 51

Odometer ........................................... 190Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 201Assistance menu ........................... 195Audio menu ................................... 193Convenience submenu .................. 199Display messages .......................... 203

Displaying a service message ........ 270DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 154Factory settings submenu ............. 200Important safety notes .................. 188Instrument cluster submenu .......... 197Lighting submenu .......................... 198Menu overview .............................. 190Message memory .......................... 203Navigation menu ............................ 192Operation ....................................... 189RACETIMER ................................... 201Service menu ................................. 197Settings menu ............................... 197Standard display ............................ 190Telephone menu ............................ 194Trip menu ...................................... 190Vehicle submenu ........................... 199Video DVD operation ..................... 193

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 28Important safety notes .................... 28

Operating systemsee On-board computer

OperationDigital Operator's Manual ................ 24

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 26

Outside temperature display ........... 188Overhead control panel ...................... 39Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 63

PPaint code number ............................ 322Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 272Panic alarm .......................................... 41Parking

Important safety notes .................. 141Parking brake ................................ 142Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passengerside ................................................ 102Rear view camera .......................... 169see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 165see Exterior mirrors

Index 15

see PARKTRONICParking assistance

see PARKTRONICParking brake

Display message ............................ 205Notes/function .............................. 142Warning lamp ................................. 228

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 106

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 165Driving system ............................... 163Function/notes ............................. 163Important safety notes .................. 163Problem (malfunction) ................... 165Range of the sensors ..................... 163Warning display ............................. 164

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 210

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFIndicator lamp .................................. 42Problems (malfunctions) ................ 210

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 63Phone book

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 275Power washers .................................. 271Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 206Operation ......................................... 56

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 196Display message ............................ 207Function/notes ................................ 72Important safety notes .................... 73Warning lamp ................................. 234

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS)

Display message ............................ 207Operation ......................................... 57

Program selector button .................. 133

Protection against theftATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75Immobilizer ...................................... 74

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 25

Pulling awayGeneral notes ................................ 125

Pulling away (automatic transmis-sion) .................................................... 125

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 30

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 29

RRACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) .................................................... 158RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 201Radiator cover ................................... 266Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 193see separate operating instructions

Radio modesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 28Reading lamp ..................................... 108Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 121Setting the airflow ......................... 118Setting the temperature ................ 117

Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 212

Rear seat (folding the backrest for-wards/back) ...................................... 245Rear seats

Display message ............................ 225Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 274Display in the multimedia system .. 170Function/notes ............................. 169Switching on/off ........................... 170

16 Index

Rear window blind ............................ 251Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 120Switching on/off ........................... 119

Rear-view mirrorDipping (automatic) ....................... 102

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 327Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34Important safety notes .................. 138Refueling process .......................... 139see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 261Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 261

Replacing bulbsGeneral notes ................................ 109

Reporting safety defects .................... 29Rescue card ......................................... 30Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 215Warning lamp ................................. 232see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 120Restraint system

Display message ............................ 208Introduction ..................................... 41Problem (malfunction) ................... 231Warning lamp (function) ................... 42

Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 129Reversing feature

Side windows ................................... 87Sliding sunroof ................................. 90Trunk lid ........................................... 83

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 212Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 27Roller sunblind

Rear window .................................. 251Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 276Roof load (maximum) ........................ 328

Route guidancesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 58see Occupant safety

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SD cardInserting ........................................ 241Inserting/removing ........................ 241Removing ....................................... 241

SD memory cardsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236Selecting ........................................ 193

Search & Sendsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 45Adjusting the height ......................... 44Cleaning ......................................... 276Correct usage .................................. 44Fastening ......................................... 44Important safety guidelines ............. 43Introduction ..................................... 42Releasing ......................................... 45Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 200Warning lamp ................................. 227Warning lamp (function) ................... 45

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 94Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port .................................................. 97Adjusting the active multicontourseat .................................................. 97Adjusting the head restraint ............ 95Adjusting the multicontour seat ....... 96Cleaning the cover ......................... 275Correct driver's seat position ........... 93Important safety notes .................... 93Overview .......................................... 93

Index 17

Seat heating .................................... 97Seat heating problem ...................... 98Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 104Switching seat heating on/off ......... 97Switching seat ventilation on/off .................................................... 98

SectionTrunk ............................................... 83

Securing a loadsee Securing cargo

Securing cargo .................................. 246Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 275Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 274Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 197Service message

see ASSYST PLUSService products

Brake fluid ..................................... 326Coolant (engine) ............................ 326Engine oil ....................................... 325Fuel ................................................ 324Important safety notes .................. 323Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 327Washer fluid ................................... 327

Setting the air distribution ............... 118Setting the airflow ............................ 118Setting the date/time format

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Setting the languagesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Setting the timesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 200On-board computer ....................... 197

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 201Side impact air bag ............................. 47Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 212

Side windowsCleaning ......................................... 273Convenience closing feature ............ 88Convenience opening feature .......... 88Important safety information ........... 87Opening/closing .............................. 87Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89Resetting ......................................... 89Reversing feature ............................. 87

SIRIUS servicessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 90Opening/closing .............................. 91Problem (malfunction) ..................... 91Resetting ......................................... 91

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 79Changing the programming ............. 77Checking the battery ....................... 79Convenience closing feature ............ 88Convenience opening feature .......... 88Display message ............................ 225Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76Important safety notes .................... 76Loss ................................................. 80Mechanical key ................................ 78Overview .......................................... 76Positions (ignition lock) ................. 123Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80Starting the engine ........................ 125

SMSsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Snow chains ...................................... 294Sockets

Center console .............................. 253General notes ................................ 253Rear compartment ......................... 254

SoundSwitching on/off ........................... 237

Spare wheelStowing .......................................... 319

Special seat belt retractor .................. 58Specialist workshop ............................ 29Speed, controlling

see Cruise control

18 Index

SpeedometerDigital ............................................ 191In the Instrument cluster ................. 34Segments ...................................... 188Selecting the display unit ............... 197

SPORT handling modeDeactivating/activating(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 71Warning lamp ................................. 231

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 212Switching on/off ........................... 106

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 124Steering

Display message ............................ 225Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(DISTRONIC PLUS)

Activating/deactivating ................. 196Display message ............................ 220

Steering wheelAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 99Button overview ............................... 35Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 189Cleaning ......................................... 275Important safety notes .................... 98Paddle shifters ............................... 135Steering wheel heating .................... 99Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 104

Steering wheel heatingProblem (malfunction) ..................... 99Switching on/off .............................. 99

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 135Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 201Stowage areas ................................... 242Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 244Center console .............................. 243Center console (rear) ..................... 244Cup holders ................................... 248Eyeglasses compartment ............... 243Glove box ....................................... 243Important safety information ......... 242Rear ............................................... 244Stowage net ................................... 245

Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 244

Stowage net ....................................... 245Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 247Summer tires ..................................... 294Sun visor ............................................ 250Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 198Suspension setting

AIRMATIC ...................................... 160AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 161

Suspension settingsSETUP (on-board computer) .......... 201

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 120Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 241

TTachometer ........................................ 188Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 212Tank

see Fuel tankTank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34Technical data

Capacities ...................................... 323Emergency spare wheel ................. 318Information .................................... 321Tires/wheels ................................. 317Vehicle data ................................... 328

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 194Authorizing a mobile phone (con-necting) ......................................... 240Connecting a mobile phone (gen-eral information) ............................ 239Display message ............................ 225Menu (on-board computer) ............ 194Number from the phone book ........ 194Redialing ........................................ 195Rejecting/ending a call ................. 194

Index 19

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236Switching between mobilephones ........................................... 241

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 188Coolant (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201Engine oil (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201Outside temperature ...................... 188Setting (climate control) ................ 117

Through-loading feature ................... 245Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 201Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 299Checking manually ........................ 298Display message ............................ 221Maximum ....................................... 298Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 281Notes ............................................. 297Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 281Recommended ............................... 295Using the TIREFIT kit ...................... 280

Tire pressure loss warning systemGeneral notes ................................ 298Important safety notes .................. 298Restarting ...................................... 299

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 301Function/notes ............................. 299General notes ................................ 299Important safety notes .................. 300Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 302Restarting ...................................... 302Warning lamp ................................. 235Warning message .......................... 301

Tire-change tool kit ........................... 277TIREFIT kit .......................................... 279

Important safety notes .................. 279Storage location ............................ 277Tire pressure not reached .............. 281Tire pressure reached .................... 281Using ............................................. 280

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 311

Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 310Bar (definition) ............................... 310Changing a wheel .......................... 312Characteristics .............................. 310Checking ........................................ 292Curb weight (definition) ................. 311Definition of terms ......................... 310Direction of rotation ...................... 313Display message ............................ 221Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 312DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 310DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 309GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 310GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 311GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 311Important safety notes .................. 292Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 310Information on driving .................... 292Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 311Labeling (overview) ........................ 307Load bearing index (definition) ...... 312Load index ..................................... 309Load index (definition) ................... 311Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 311Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 311Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 311Maximum tire load ......................... 309Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 311MOExtended tires .......................... 294Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 312PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 311Replacing ....................................... 312Service life ..................................... 293Sidewall (definition) ....................... 311Speed rating (definition) ................ 311

20 Index

Storing ........................................... 313Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 310Temperature .................................. 306TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 312Tire bead (definition) ...................... 311Tire pressure (definition) ................ 311Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 310Tire size (data) ............................... 317Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 307Tire tread ....................................... 293Tire tread (definition) ..................... 311Total load limit (definition) ............. 312Traction ......................................... 306Traction (definition) ....................... 312Tread wear ..................................... 306Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 305Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 310Wear indicator (definition) ............. 312Wheel and tire combination ........... 317Wheel rim (definition) .................... 310see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 60Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 290Important safety notes .................. 287

Towing a trailerESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 72

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 287Installing the towing eye ................ 288Removing the towing eye ............... 289Transporting the vehicle ................ 289With both axles on the ground ....... 289With the rear axle raised ................ 289

Towing eye ......................................... 277Traffic reports

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Traffic Sign AssistDisplay message ............................ 216Function/notes ............................. 178Important safety notes .................. 178

Instrument cluster display ............. 178Transfer case ..................................... 138Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransmission position display ......... 130Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 130Transporting the vehicle .................. 289Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 275Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 191Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 190Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 191

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 86Important safety notes .................... 83Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 85Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 84Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 84

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 224Opening dimensions ...................... 328

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 328Turn signals

Display message ............................ 212Switching on/off ........................... 106

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 321Installation ..................................... 321Transmission output (maximum) .... 321

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 83From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 82

Upshift indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 201

Index 21

USB devicesConnecting to the Media Inter-face ............................................... 241

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 251Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 29Data acquisition ............................... 30Display message ............................ 223Equipment ....................................... 26Individual settings .......................... 197Limited Warranty ............................. 30Loading .......................................... 302Locking (in an emergency) ............... 83Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76Lowering ........................................ 316Maintenance .................................... 27Parking for a long period ................ 143Pulling away ................................... 125Raising ........................................... 313Reporting problems ......................... 29Securing from rolling away ............ 313Towing away .................................. 287Transporting .................................. 289Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 83Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76Vehicle data ................................... 328

Vehicle data ....................................... 328Vehicle dimensions ........................... 328Vehicle emergency locking ................ 83Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 322Vehicle level

AIRMATIC ...................................... 159Vehicle level (display message) ....... 215Vehicle tool kit .................................. 277Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 193see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

VINSeat ............................................... 323Type plate ...................................... 322

Voice Control Systemsee See also Digital Operator's Manual

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 229Brakes ........................................... 228Check Engine ................................. 232Coolant .......................................... 232Distance warning ........................... 234ESP® .............................................. 229ESP® OFF ....................................... 230Fuel tank ........................................ 232General notes ................................ 226Overview .......................................... 34PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 42Reserve fuel ................................... 232Restraint system ............................ 231Seat belt ........................................ 227SPORT handling mode ................... 231Tire pressure monitor .................... 235

Warranty .............................................. 26Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 225Weather display (COMAND)

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 236

Wheel and tire combinationsTires ............................................... 317

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 316Wheel chock ...................................... 313Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 312Checking ........................................ 292Cleaning ......................................... 273Emergency spare wheel ................. 317Important safety notes .................. 292Information on driving .................... 292Interchanging/changing ................ 312Mounting a new wheel ................... 315Mounting a wheel .......................... 313Removing a wheel .......................... 315Storing ........................................... 313Tightening torque ........................... 316Wheel size/tire size ....................... 317

Window curtain air bagOperation ......................................... 49

Windowssee Side windows

22 Index

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 118

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 269Important safety notes .................. 327

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 111Replacing the wiper blades ............ 110Switching on/off ........................... 109

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 294Slippery road surfaces ................... 147Snow chains .................................. 294

Winter operationRadiator cover ............................... 266

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 294

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 273Important safety notes .................. 110Replacing ....................................... 110

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 275Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 118

Index 23

Introduction

The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-mation about the safe operation of your vehicle.The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-hensive and specifically adapted information onyour vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-ual via the multimedia system.

i You will not incur any costs when calling upthe Digital Operator's Manual. The DigitalOperator's Manual works without connectingto the Internet.

There are three ways to access the topics of theDigital Operator's Manual:RVisual searchThe visual search allows you to explore yourvehicle "virtually". Starting from either thevehicle exterior view or interior view, you canaccess many of the different topics coveredby the Digital Operator's Manual. To accessthe vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-cle interior" view.RKeyword searchThe keyword search allows you to search for akeyword by entering characters.RContentsYou can select individual sections in the con-tents.

i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-ted for safety reasons while driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-ualX Press theØ button on the center console.The overview relating to the vehicle appears.

X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item byturning3 or pressing7 the controller.

X Confirm7 the message about the warningand safety notes.The basic menu for the Digital Operator'sManual appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man-ual

General notesPlease observe the information about the oper-ation of the controller (Y page 237).

Content pagesThe content pages can be accessed bymeans ofa visual search, a keyword search or using thecontents.

X To scroll forward/backward: turn3 thecontroller.

X To display in full-screen or animation: slide8 the controller to the left:.

X To select information text or save book-marks: slide9 the controller to theright;.

X To select a link: slide6 the controllerdownwards=.

X To exit a content page: select the%symbol?.

X To call up the basic menu of the DigitalOperator's Manual: selectÞ symbolA.

X To switch functions to the multimediasystem using the buttons on the centerconsole: press the$,%,Õ orØbutton.The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-ator's Manual remains open in the back-ground.

24 Digital Operator's Manual

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions require youto dispose of materials, first try to regenerate orre-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-tal rules and regulations when disposing ofmaterials. In this way you will help to protect theenvironment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels aswell as accessories relevant to safety whichhave not been approved byMercedes-Benz. Thiscould lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 25

Introductio

n

Z

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintaina supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. In addition,strategically located parts delivery centers pro-vide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benzparts (Y page 322).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmenti ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Bear in mindthat your vehicle may not feature all functionsdescribed here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equip-ment in your vehiclemay therefore differ fromthat shown in the descriptions and illustra-tions.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-let are important documents and should be keptin the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies inaccordance with the warranty terms and condi-tions in the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordance with the following warranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Islandand Vermont Emission Control System War-rantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessorieswarranties. These are available at any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a reason-able number of repair attempts Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or servicefacilities fail to fix one or more substantialdefects or malfunctions in the vehicle that arecovered by its express warranty.During the period of 18 months from originaldelivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on theodometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or moreof the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction

results in a condition that is likely to cause

26 Service and vehicle operationIntroductio

n

death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle isdriven, that defect or malfunction has beensubject to repair two ormore times, and youhave directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunctionof a less serious nature than category (1)has been subject to repair four or moretimes and you have directly notifiedMercedes-Benz in writing of the need for itsrepair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance Center3 Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceAlways bring the Maintenance Booklet with youwhen taking the vehicle to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. Your customer serviceadvisor will enter every service into your Main-tenance Booklet on your behalf.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram offers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100(Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programbrochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"section in the Service and Warranty Booklet(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu-ment wallet.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, please sendus the "Notification of Address Change" in theService and Warranty Booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-ature in the vehicle so that it is available to thenext owner.If you have purchased a used car, please send usthe "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in theService and Warranty Booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaWhen you are abroad with your vehicle, observethe following points:RService facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconverter may not be available. Leaded fuelcan cause damage to the catalytic converter.RThe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane number. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available fordelivery in Europe through our European Deliv-ery Program. For details, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or write to one of thefollowing addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Service and vehicle operation 27

Introductio

n

Z

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriage orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the undercar-riage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Declaration of conformity forwirelessvehicle componentsUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the two following two conditions: 1)These devices may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and 2) These devices must accept anyinterference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation. Changesor modifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) These devices maynot cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device."

28 Operating safetyIntroductio

n

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intended forthe connection of diagnostic equipment at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of vehicle systems. As a result, theoperating safety of the vehicle could be affec-ted. There is a risk of an accident.Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-nection in the vehicle, which is approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipmenton the diagnostics connection is used, thestarter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-mation being reset, for example. This may leadto the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements ofthe next emissions test during the main inspec-tion.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-fied specialist workshop. It has the necessaryspecialist knowledge, tools and qualifications tocorrectly carry out the work required on yourvehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-evant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when drivingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRtechnical data for the vehicleRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotorvehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-isfaction, please discuss the problem again withan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec-essary, contact us at one of the followingaddresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLC3 Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:

Operating safety 29

Introductio

n

Z

The following text is reproduced as required ofall manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to theNational Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of1966.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual aboutthe proper operation of your vehicle as well asabout possible vehicle damage. Damage toyour vehicle that arises from culpable contra-ventions against these instructions is not cov-ered either by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-cue card for your vehicle. The current rescuecard contains the most important informationabout your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. therouting of the electric cables.You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/

content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storageA wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rthe vehicle's operating stateRincidentsRmalfunctionsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system components,e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of itsindividual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important systemcomponents, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditions inspecial driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-ment, intervention of stability control sys-temsRambient conditions, e.g. outside temperatureThis data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-tions and defectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functionsThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamemoryand malfunction data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarrantiesRquality assurance

30 Data stored in the vehicleIntroductio

n

The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-vice network (including the manufacturer) usingspecial diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-mation is obtained from it, if required.After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-mation is deleted from the malfunction memoryor is continually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-tion with other information (if necessary, underconsultation with an authorized expert), couldbe traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have been con-tractually agreed upon with the customer allowcertain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-cle as well. The additional functions include, forexample, vehicle location in case of an emer-gency.

COMAND/mbraceIf the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle'soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual or the Digital OwnersManual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-tions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). The main purpose ofan EDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle's systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:RHow various systems in your vehicle wereoperatingRWhether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastenedRHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRHow fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur. NOTE: EDRdata are recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDRunder normal driving conditions and no personaldata (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)are recorded. However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement could combine the EDR datawith the type of personally identifying data rou-tinely acquired during a crash investigation.Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is neededto read data that is recorded by an EDR, andspecial equipment is required. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessing thevehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the CrashData Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extractdata from the EDR is commercially available,Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expresslydisclaims any and all liability arising from theextraction of this information by unauthorizedMercedes-Benz personnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or, ifthe vehicle is leased, without the consent of thelessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by law enforce-ment; by federal, state or local government; inconnectionwith or arising out of litigation involv-ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter-ing, modifying or removing the EDR componentmay result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-tem Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, the

Data stored in the vehicle 31

Introductio

n

Z

federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-sourcesoftware used in your vehicle and its electroniccomponents is available on the following web-site:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

32 Information on copyrightIntroductio

n

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shift-ers 135

; Combination switch 106

= Instrument cluster 34

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 130

B PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 163

C Overhead control panel 39

D Climate control systems 112

E Ignition lock 123Start/Stop button 123

Function Page

F Adjusts the steering wheelmanually 98

G Adjusts the steering wheelelectrically 98Steering wheel heating 99

H Cruise control lever 148

I Parking brake 142

J Diagnostics connection 29

K Opens the hood 265

L Releases the parking brake 142

M Light switch 105

Cockpit 33

Ataglance

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: Fuel gauge (left)Coolant temperature (right) 188Warning and indicator lamps:÷ ESP® 229M SPORT handling modein Mercedes-AMG vehicles 231· Distance warning 234å ESP® OFF 229# Turn signal, left 106? Coolant 232K High-beam headlamps 106L Low-beam headlamps 106T Parking lamps 106R This lamp has no func-tion8 Reserve fuel 232Fuel filler flap location indi-cator: the fuel filler cap is onthe right-hand side.

Function Page

; Speedometer with segments 188

= Multifunction display 190

? Tachometer 188Warning and indicator lamps:$ Brakes (USA only) 228J Brakes (Canada only) 228! Turn signal, right 106! ABS 2296 Restraint system 42; Check Engine 232h Tire pressure monitor 235ü Seat belt 227÷ ESP® in Mercedes-AMG vehicles 231

Information on the display of the outside tem-perature in the multifunction display can befound under "Outside temperature display"(Y page 188).

Set the lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicle interiorusing the on-board computer (Y page 198).

34 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 190

; Multimedia system display

= ?

Switches on voice-operatednavigation or the Voice Con-trol System8

MuteWX

Adjusts the volume~

Rejects or ends a call 194Exits the telephone book/redial memory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial mem-ory

Function Page

? =;

Selects a menu 1899:

Selects a submenu or scrollsthrough lists 189a

Confirms a selection 189Hides display messages 203%

Back 189Switches off voice-operatednavigation or the Voice Con-trol System

i Vehicles with multimedia systemAudio 20:Additional information can be found:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon voice-operated control for navigation inthe manufacturer's operating instructions

i Vehicles with multimedia systemCOMAND:Additional information can be found:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the Voice Control System in the sepa-rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 35

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Multimedia system (see theDigital Operator's Manual)

; c Seat heating 97

= s Seat ventilation 98

? c PARKTRONIC 163

A ¤ ECO start/stop func-tion 126

Function Page

B 4 5 Indicator lamp 49

C £ Hazard warning lamps 107

D u Rear window roller sun-blind 251

36 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

Function Page

E Stowage compartment 242Ashtray 252Cigarette lighter 252Socket 253

F Cup holder 248

G e Adjusts the suspensionsettings 160

Function Page

H É Sets the vehicle level 159

I Stowage compartment withMedia Interface 244

J Ú Selects the drive pro-gram 133

K Multimedia system control-ler 237

Center console 37

Ataglance

Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Function Page

F Cup holder 248

G Engages park position P 141

H Selector lever 129

I Ashtray 252Cigarette lighter 252Socket 253

J Multimedia system control-ler 237

Function Page

K Stowage compartment withMedia Interface 244

L ß Calls up or saves thesuspension settings 161

M à Adjusts the suspensionsettings 161

N å ESP® 71

O Drive program selector 134

38 Center consoleAt

aglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: u Switches the rear inte-rior lighting on/off 108

; |Switches the automaticinterior lighting controlon/off 108

= p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 108

? ï Info call button 257

A 3 Opens/closes the slid-ing sunroof 91

B G SOS button 255

C Rear-view mirrorAutomatic anti-glare 102

Function Page

D Buttons for the garage dooropener 261

E Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and Voice ControlSystem (see the Digital Oper-ator's Manual)

F F Breakdown assistancecall button 256

G p Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 108

H c Switches the front inte-rior lighting on/off 108

Overhead control panel 39

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: r45=Stores seat, exterior mirrorand steering column adjust-ment settings 103

; Adjusts the seats electrically 94

= %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 82

? Opens the door 81

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exteriormirrors in/out electrically 101

Function Page

B W Opens/closes the sidewindows 87

C n Activates/deactivatesthe override feature for theside windows in the rearcompartment 63

D p Opens/closes thetrunk lid 85

40 Door control panelAt

aglance

Panic alarm

X To arm: press! button: for approx-imately one second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.

X To disarm: press! button: again.orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.The restraint system can also reduce the forcestowhich vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.The restraint system comprises:Rseat belt systemRair bagsRchild restraint systemRchild seat securing systemsThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times, allvehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 44)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 93).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the correctdriver's seat position (Y page 93).You also have to make sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 46).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the air bagincreases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. For exam-ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protectionoffered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bagsare not deployed.When an accident occurs, onlythe air bags that increase protection in that par-ticular accident situation are deployed. How-ever, seat belts and air bags generally do notprotect against objects penetrating the vehiclefrom the outside.Information on restraint system operation canbe found under "Triggering of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 53).For information on children traveling with you inthe vehicle and on child restraint systems, see"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 58).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary to modify components of therestraint system to accommodate a personwith disabilities, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:for further information contact our CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1‑800‑367‑6372).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usedriving aids which have been approved specifi-cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and atregular intervals while the engine is running.Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switchedonRdoes not go out after a few seconds with theengine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig-gered unintentionally or may not deploy asintended during an accident. This can affectfor example the Emergency TensioningDevice or the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: ispart of the Occupant Classification System(OCS).The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampinforms you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp:Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. It will then not be deployed in theevent of an accident.Ris not lit: the front-passenger front air bag isenabled. If, in the event of an accident, alldeployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed.

Depending on the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag musteither be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-lowing points. You must make sure of this bothbefore and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on the instal-led child restraint system, and the age andsize of the child. Therefore, be sure to observethe notes on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Chil-dren in the vehicle" (Y page 58). There youwill also find instructions on rearward andforward-facing child restraint systems on thefront-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the classi-fication of the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-bled or deactivated (Y page 49). Be sure toobserve the notes on "Seatbelts“ (Y page 42) and "Air bags"(Y page 46). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occupantsin the event of an accident or the vehicle rollingover. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehicleinterior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle

42 Occupant safetySafety

occupant in the best position in relation to theair bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for the frontseat belts and the outer seat belts in the rearRSeat belt force limiters for the front seat beltsand the outer seat belts in the rear

If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outletquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-ted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens theseat belt in an accident, pulling the belt closeagainst the body. However it does not pull thevehicle occupant back in the direction of thebackrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or the routing ofan incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps toreduce the force exerted by the seat belt on thevehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seats aresynchronized with the front air bags, whichabsorb part of the deceleration force. This canreduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-pants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,do not engage the seat belt tongue in thebuckle on the front-passenger seat. Other-wise, in the event of an accident, the Emer-gency Tensioning Device and front-passengerfront air bagmay be triggered andwould needto be replaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEvenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicleoccupants should correctly fasten their seatbelts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannotperform its intended protective function. An

incorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing directionabruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position.When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannotwear the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional and suitable restraint system. If theseat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-form its intended protective function. Anincorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing directionabruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50m) tall in suitable additional restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro-priate to the age, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 58) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 49)

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,although the damage may not be visible, e.g.due to splinters of glass.Modified or damagedseat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devicescould accidentally trigger or fail to deploywhen necessary. This poses an increased riskof injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 43).All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seatbelt correctly before beginning the journey. Alsomake sure that all vehicle occupants are alwayswearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicleis in motion.

When fastening the seat belt, always make surethat:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the beltbuckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur be dis-tributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or be routedunder your arm. Where possible, adjust theseat belt to the appropriate height.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down aspossible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdomen.This applies particularly to pregnant women.If necessary, push the lap belt down to yourhip joint and pull it tight using the shouldersection of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-ted or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, storethese in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time.Infants and children must never travel sittingon the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seat belt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.Also ensure that there are never objectsbetween a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-gage or loads (Y page 242).

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 44).

44 Occupant safetySafety

Basic illustrationX Adjust the seat (Y page 93).The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-tical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outletand engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightened auto-matically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 45).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of the shoul-der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.The belt outlet will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt outlet release= and slidebelt outlet downwards.

X Let go of belt outlet release= in the desiredposition and make sure that the belt outletengages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be found under"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 58).

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat beltscan no longer fulfill their protective function

and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Press the release button in the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the beltback.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This func-tion adjusts the driver's and front-passengerseat belt to the upper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle andRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certainretraction force if any slack is detected betweenthe vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do nothold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-ing.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on andoff in the on-board computer (Y page 200).

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-pants must wear their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there may bea warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt hasalready been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time theengine is started. If, after six seconds, the driveror front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastenedor a front door is opened again, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after theengine is started, an additional warning tone willsound. The warning tone switches off after sixseconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-tened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarningtone sounds. A warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

driver or front passenger have fastened theirseat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-ing is activated again.

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fastenedseat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. Theair bag provides additional protection in appli-cable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Thedifferent air bag systems function independ-ently from one another (Y page 53).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position. The center of

the head restraint must support the head atabout eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seatsas far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against thedoor or side window. Youmay otherwise be inthe deployment area of the air bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in frontof the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the air bag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitablechild restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installed onthe rear seats.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatwhen the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 42).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Children in thevehicle" (Y page 58) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationand operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may preventan air bag from functioning correctly. Beforestarting your journey and to avoid risks resultingfrom the speed of the air bag as it deploys, makesure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.

46 Occupant safetySafety

Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are inthe pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box.

When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the front seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampinforms you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 42).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensorreadings, detects that the front-passengerseat is occupied (Y page 49)Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up (Y page 49)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steeringcolumn and front-passenger knee bag; underthe glove box. The driver's and front-passengerknee bags are triggered together with the frontair bags.The driver's and front-passenger knee bagsoffer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-tection for the occupants in the front seats.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-vent deployment of the air bags integratedinto the seats. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. In addition, the operation ofthe occupant classification system (OCS)could be adversely affected. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outer bol-ster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impact airbag is deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys under the following conditions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckleof the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independentof whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Pelvis air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-vent deployment of the air bags integratedinto the seats. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. In addition, the operation ofthe occupant classification system (OCS)

could be adversely affected. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Pelvis air bags: deploy below next to the outerseat cushions.When activated, the pelvis air bag enhances thelevel of protection of the vehicle occupants onthe side of the vehicle on which the impactoccurs.The pelvis air bag is deployed on the side of theimpact.The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sidedoes not deploy under the following conditions:Rthe OCS detects that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied orRthe belt tongue is not engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat.

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sidedeploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independentof whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

48 Occupant safetySafety

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integrated intothe side of the roof frame and deployed in thearea from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest or arms.In the event of a side impact, the window curtainair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 53).

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.Depending on that result, the front-passengerfront air bag and front-passenger knee bag areeither enabled or deactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

RequirementsTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with their backagainst the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possibleIf the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-tion, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat, besure to observe the correct positioning of thechild restraint system. Never place objectsunder or behind the child restraint system, e.g. acushion. The entire base of the child restraintsystem must always rest on the seat cushion ofthe front-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint systemmust lie asflat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint system must not touch theroof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:shows youwhether the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock or on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,press the Start/Stop button once or twice.The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampmust light up for approximately six seconds.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampthen displays the status of the front-passengerfront air bag. If the status of the front-passengerfront air bag changes while the vehicle is inmotion, an air bag display message may appearin the instrument cluster (Y page 210). Whenthe front-passenger seat is occupied, alwayspay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp. Be aware of the status of thefront-passenger front air bag both before andduring the journey.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp:Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. It will then not be deployed in theevent of an accident.Ris not lit: the front-passenger front air bag isenabled. If, in the event of an accident, alldeployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-

bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isoff, the front-passenger front air bag candeploy in the event of an accident. The childcould be struck by the air bag. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, the child could, in theevent of an accident:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always make sure that the shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from the vehiclebelt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide onthe child restraint system. The shoulder beltstrap must be routed forwards and down-wards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If nec-essary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide andthe front-passenger seat accordingly. Alwaysobserve the child restraint system manufac-turer's installation instructions.

50 Occupant safetySafety

If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to twelvemonths old, in a standardchild restraint system, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated.But even in the case of a twelve-month-oldchild, in a standard child restraint system, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp cango out after the system self-test. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isactivated. The result of the classification isdependent on, among other factors, the childrestraint system and the child's stature. It isrecommended that you install the childrestraint system on a suitable rear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager orsmall adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp lights up and remains lit afterthe system self-test depending on the resultof the classification or, alternatively, goes out.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is off, move the front-passenger seatas far back as possible. Alternatively, a per-son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of adult stature, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampgoes out after the system self-test. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isactivated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure toobserve the notes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 58).When the occupant classification system (OCS)is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint systemwarning lamp in the instrument cluster and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lightup simultaneously. The front-passenger front airbag is deactivated in this case and does notdeploy during an accident. Have the OccupantClassification System (OCS) checked and

repaired immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor this purpose.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or theseat cushion are damaged, have the necessaryrepair work carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor this purpose.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessories thathave been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bag willalso deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, thefront-passenger front air bag is either enabled ordeactivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light up during the system self-test, then the system is malfunctioning. Thefront-passenger front air bag might be trig-gered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident withhigh deceleration. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedas far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp displays the status ofthe front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49).For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-lems with the Occupant Classification System"(Y page 52).

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 51).

52 Occupant safetySafety

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamplights up and remains lit,even though the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or a per-son of a stature corre-sponding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-rect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the personon the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 49).

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up and/ordoes not stay on.The front-passenger seatis:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child up totwelve months old in achild restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the childseat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests onthe seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seatbelt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passengerseat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the childrestraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the childrestraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-ingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto theseat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It isrecommended that you install the child restraint system on a suit-able rear seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the air bags

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

continue to perform their protective function forthe vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNINGEmergency Tensioning Devices that havedeployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have pyrotechnically triggered EmergencyTensioning Devices replaced immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig-ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardoussituations. This procedure is reversible.If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggeredor air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. The 6 restraint system warninglamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. The powder that is released generally doesnot constitute a health hazard, but it may causeshort-term breathing difficulties in people withasthma or other respiratory problems. Providedit is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicleimmediately or open the window in order to pre-vent breathing difficulties.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. National guidelines mustbe observed during disposal. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal orrear collision.

An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational. You can find further informationunder: "Restraint system warning lamp"(Y page 42)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rearcompartment are triggered independently of thelock status of the seat belts.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bags and driver's knee bagRWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-mines that deployment can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activated ordeactivated depending on the person on thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger frontair bag can only deploy in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIRBAG OFF indicator lamp (Y page 42).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. Duringthe first deployment stage, the front air bag isfilled with propellant gas to reduce the risk ofinjuries. The front air bag is fully deployed withthe maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-ond deployment threshold is reached within afew milliseconds.The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and the air bag are determinedby evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration which occurs at various points inthe vehicle. This process is pre-emptive innature. Deployment should take place in goodtime at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the collisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehicleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci-

54 Occupant safetySafety

sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor dothey provide an indication of air bag deploy-ment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-out an air bag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts which are relatively easily deformedare affected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigidvehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occursas a result.If the restraint system control unit detects a sideimpact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicablecomponents of the restraint system are activa-ted independently of each other depending onthe apparent type of accident.RSide impact air bags and pelvis air bag on theside the impact takes place, independently ofthe Emergency TensioningDevice and the useof the seat belt on the driver's seat and outerseats in the second row- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,independently of the use of the seat belt andindependently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedREmergency Tensioning Devices, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection in this situationRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger side in certain situationswhen the vehicle rolls over, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by the seatbelt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems work independ-ently of each other.How the air bag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration and the apparent type of accident:RFrontal collisionRSide impactRRollover

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe function of the head restraint may beimpaired if you:Rattach objects such as coat hangers to thehead restraints, for exampleRuse head restraint coversIf you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfilltheir intended protective function in the eventof an accident. In addition, objects attachedto the head restraints could endanger othervehicle occupants. There is an increased riskof injury.Do not attach any objects to the headrestraints and do not use head restraint cov-ers.

Method of operationNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints offer additional protectionagainst head and neck injuries. In the event of arear collision of a certain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints on the driver's and front-passengerseats are moved forwards and upwards. Thisprovides better head support.If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints have been triggered in anaccident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver'sseat and the front-passenger seat(Y page 56). Otherwise, the additional protec-tion will not be available in the event of anotherrear-end collision. You can see that a NECK-PROhead restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restrainthas been triggered if it is tilted forward and canno longer be adjusted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thefunctionality of the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at aqualified specialist workshop after a rear-endcollision.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO headrestraint/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraint

NECK-PRO head restraints

Do not insert your finger between the cushion ofthe head restraint and the cover. Pay particularattention while resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints.X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction of arrow:.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown as far as it will go in the direction ofarrow;.

X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion backwards in thedirection of arrow= until it engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint.

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you have difficultyresetting theNECK-PRO head restraints, havethis work carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Do not insert your finger between the cushion ofthe head restraint and the cover. Pay particularattention while resetting the NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints.X Remove resetting tool: from the vehicledocument wallet.

X Slide resetting tool: into guide; betweenthe NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and therear cover of the head restraint.

X Push resetting tool: downwards until youhear the head restraint deployment mecha-nism engage.

X Pull out resetting tool:.X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion backwardsin the direction of arrow= until it engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.

X Put resetting tool: back into the vehicledocument wallet.

i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints, have this workcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

IntroductionIn certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehi-cle occupants.

Important safety notes! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats. There is a dangerthat the seats and/or objects could be dam-aged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.

Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of anaccident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt yourdriving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

56 Occupant safetySafety

FunctionPRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-steers or oversteers severelyRon vehicles with the Driving Assistance pack-age: if BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or theradar sensor system detects an imminentdanger of collision in certain situations

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is inan unfavorable position.Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and thesliding sunroof are closed.Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or activemulticontour seat: the air pressure in the sidebolsters of the backrest is increased.

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the beltpre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontourseats or active multicontour seats, the air pres-sure in the side bolsters is reduced again. Allsettings made by PRE-SAFE® can then bereversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightlywhen the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa-tion about the convenience function can befound under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 45).

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-pant protection system PLUS)

IntroductionPRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-endcollision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-

uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notesThe intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannotprevent an imminent collision.The driver is not warned about the interventionof PRE-SAFE® PLUS.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehi-cle is backing up.When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-ing space with assistance from Active ParkingAssist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply thebrakes.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-tions if the radar sensor system detects animminent head-on or rear-end collision.PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rif the radar sensor system detects that ahead-on collision is imminent, the seat beltsare pre-tensioned.Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent:- the brake pressure is increased if the driverapplies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can-celed:Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when agear is engagedRif the risk of a collision passes or is no longerdetectedRif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention topull away

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, the original settings arerestored.

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending on thetype and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRvehicles with a memory function: the electri-cally adjustable steering wheel is raisedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel supplyis cut offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergencycall

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installa child restraint system on a rear seat. Childrenare generally better protected there.If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.The child restraint system must be appropri-ate to the age, weight and size of the childRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in this section in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 49)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 44).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where athree-point seat belt can be properly fastenedwithout a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer be

58 Children in the vehicleSafety

secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retractorensures that the seat belt will not slacken oncethe child restraint system has been secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-let.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seat beltretractor is activated.

X Push the child seat restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing a child restraint system and deacti-vating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Press the release button of the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it backtowards the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provinces

You can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-lines" (Y page 242).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.

Children in the vehicle 59

Safety

Z

Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint systemsare:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchoragesIf it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observe theinformation on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 49). There you will alsofind information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-responds to the standards can be found on aninstruction label on the child restraint system.This confirmation can also be found in the instal-lation instructions that are included with thechild restraint system.Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

systems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-lation and operating instructions for the childrestraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engagedcorrectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings

When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system, fold protective caps; ofsecuring rings: inwards.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystemon both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings:.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems are installed on the left and right of therear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may alsobe used and can be installed using the vehicle'sseat belt system. Install the child seat accordingto the manufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system secured witha LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.If the child restraint system is equipped with aTop Tether belt, this should always be used.

60 Children in the vehicleSafety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protectivefunction. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-ests so that they are in an upright position.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in the multifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster. Awarning tonealso sounds.

Top Tether anchorages

Top Tether anchorage points= are installed inthe rear compartment behind the outer headrestraints.X Move head restraint: upwards.X Fold up cover; of Top Tether anchorage=.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystem with Top Tether. Always comply withthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether beltA under headrestraint: between the two head restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook? into Top Tetheranchorage=.

X Make sure that Top Tether beltA is not twis-ted.

X Tension Top Tether beltA. Always complywith the child restraint system manufactur-er's installation instructions when doing so.

X Fold down cover; of Top Tether anchorage=.

X Move head restraint: back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 95).Make sure that you do not interfere with thecorrect routing of Top Tether beltA.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installthe child restraint system on a rear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 49).

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

Z

You can thus avoid the risks that could arise asa result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is permanently lit (Y page 42) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passengerseat. The child restraint system must not touchthe roof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap iscorrectly routed from the vehicle belt outlet tothe shoulder belt guide on the child restraintsystem. The shoulder belt strap must be routedforwards and downwards from the vehicle beltoutlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt out-let and the front-passenger seat accordingly.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 63)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 63)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

62 Children in the vehicleSafety

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door securedwith a child-proof lock cannot be opened frominside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,the door can be opened from the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof lock leverup in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks arework-ing properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate:press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of the rearside windows is disabled. Operation is onlypossible using the switches in the driver'sdoor. If indicator lamp: is off, operation ispossible using the switches in the rear com-partment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Pets in the vehicle 63

Safety

Z

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 64)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 65)RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) withCross-Traffic Assist (Y page 65)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 67)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 69)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 72)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for maintaining the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time, and for staying in lane. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described only workas effectively as possible when there is ade-quate contact between the tires and the roadsurface. Pay particular attention to the informa-tion regarding tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires"section (Y page 292).In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.Only in this way will the driving safety systemsdescribed in this section work as effectively aspossible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a way thatthe wheels do not lock when you brake. Thisallows you to continue steering the vehiclewhenbraking.The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when youonly brake gently.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 64).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 229) and dis-play messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 204).

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions, and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.

64 Driving safety systemsSafety

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situations.If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BASautomatically boosts the braking force, thusshortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 64).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) withCross-Traffic Assist

General informationBAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of acollision with a vehicle or a pedestrian andreduce the effects of such a collision. If BASPLUS detects a danger of collision, you areassisted when braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 64).

BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with theDriving Assistance package.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system and the camera systemmust be operational.

With the help of a sensor system and a camerasystem, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of timeRthat cross the path of your vehicleIn addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typicalcharacteristics such as the body contours andposture of a person standing upright.If the radar sensor system or the camera systemis malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions arerestricted or no longer available. The brake sys-tem is still available with complete brake boost-ing effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" section(Y page 65).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo-ple, this is especially the case if they are mov-ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in thesecases. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen cornering

Driving safety systems 65

Safety

Z

As a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different lineRvehicles quickly move into the radar sensorsystem detection range

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sunbeing low in the skyRdarknessRor if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionAt speeds of under20 mph(30 km/h): if youdepress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated.The increase in brake pressure will be carriedout at the last possible moment.At speeds of above20 mph(30 km/h): if youdepress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUSautomatically increases the brake pressure to adegree suited to the traffic situation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-ardous situations with vehicles in front within aspeed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and155 mph (250 km/h).Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS may react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicleRobstacles crossing your path, which move inthe detection range of the sensors and arerecognized by them

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak-ing force, preventative passenger protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simulta-neously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-tion as usual, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou activate kickdown.

66 Driving safety systemsSafety

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 64).

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS consistsof a distance warning function with an autono-mous braking function and adaptive BrakeAssist.COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS can helpyou to minimize the risk of a front-end collisionwith a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects ofsuch a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbewarned visually and acoustically. If you do notreact to the visual and audible collision warning,autonomous braking can be initiated in criticalsituations. If you apply the brake yourself in acritical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.

Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLI-SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the notes in the section on breaking-in (Y page 122).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.

Activating/deactivatingThe COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isautomatically active after switching on the igni-tion.You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com-puter (Y page 196). When deactivated, the dis-tance warning function and the autonomousbraking function are also deactivated.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, theæ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.

Distance warning function

General informationThe distance warning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision with avehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such acollision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbe warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 64).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warning

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

Z

There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionAt and above a speed of approximately 4 mph(7 km/h), the distance warning function warnsyou if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound, andthe· distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the system to display a warning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-ded period of time.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), the distance warning function canalso react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-ped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distance warn-ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with theautonomous braking function.The autonomous braking function is available inthe following speed ranges:Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph(105 km/h) for moving objectsRfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph(50 km/h) for stationary objects

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-tion to intervene.If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously.

Adaptive Brake Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 64).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-tance warning signal can detect obstacles thatare in the path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a collision. Ifyou apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive BrakeAssist will automatically increase the brakingforce to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speeds above4mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technologyto assess the traffic situation.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable ofreacting to moving objects that have alreadybeen detected as such at least once over theperiod of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-tionary obstacles.If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activatedsimultaneously (Y page 56).X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 64).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause Brake Assist to intervene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to amalfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with full brakeboosting effect and BAS.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 64).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.power transmission between the tires and theroad surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating fromthe direction desired by the driver, one or morewheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. Theengine output is also modified to keep the vehi-cle on the desired course within physical limits.ESP® assists the driver when pulling away onwet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilizethe vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicleswith 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-red to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 64).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or perform-ance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axledynamometer. Before you operate the vehicleon such a dynamometer, please consult aqualified workshop. You could otherwisedamage the drive train or the brake system.

Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes onESP® (Y page 289) when towing the vehiclewith a raised rear axle.If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upcontinuously, then ESP® is deactivated.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the åESP® OFF warning lamp are lit continuously,ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 229) and display messages which maybe shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 204).

i Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

Z

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the÷ ESP®warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehicle stopsmoving. The engine starts automatically whenthe driver wants to pull away again. ESP®remains in its previously selected status, e.g. ifESP® was deactivated before the engine wasautomatically switched off.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptMercedes‑AMG vehicles)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 64).

You can select between the following states ofESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelSpinning the wheels results in a cutting actionwhich provides better grip.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle ifthe vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.

Deactivating/activating ESP®You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer (Y page 195).ESP®deactivated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.ESP®activated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes. In such situations,ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.RTraction control is still activated.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longeravailable; nor is it activated if you brake firmlywith assistance from ESP®.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-venes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it isalso not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

70 Driving safety systemsSafety

Deactivating/activating ESP®(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 64).

You can select between the following states ofESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-dents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-uations described in the following.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon specially designated roads when the vehi-cle's own oversteering and understeeringcharacteristics are desired

Spinning the wheels results in a cutting actionwhich provides better grip.Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified and expe-rienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if

the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode: brieflypress button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up. TheSPORT handling mode message appears inthe multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button: untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster.The ÷ OFF message appears in the multi-function display.

X To activate ESP®: briefly press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP®ON message appears in the multifunction dis-play.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-dling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and one ormore wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP®only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.RTraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

Z

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster does not flash. In such situa-tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.RTraction control is still activated.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longeravailable; nor is it activated if you brake firmlywith assistance from ESP®.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-venes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it isalso not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

ESP® trailer stabilization

General informationESP® trailer stabilization is not available inMercedes-AMG vehicles.If your vehicle/trailer combination begins toswerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP®slows the vehicle down by braking and limitingthe engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-bination has stabilized.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilizethe vehicle/trailer combination by depressingthe brake firmly.

ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speedsof about 65 km/h.ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®is deactivated or disabled because of amalfunc-tion.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pressureon the rear wheels to improve driving stabilitywhile braking.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 64).

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 229) as well as displaymessages (Y page 205).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 64).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety andoffers increased braking comfort. In addition tothe braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also hasthe HOLD function (Y page 157) and hill startassist (Y page 125).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General informationPRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize therisk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or apedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a

72 Driving safety systemsSafety

collision. If PRE-SAFE®Brake has detected a riskof collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically as well as by automatic braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 64).

PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance Plus package.For PRE-SAFE®Brake to assist youwhen driving,the radar sensor system and the camera systemmust be switched on and be operational.With the help of the radar sensor system and thecamera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detectobstacles that are in front of your vehicle for anextended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians usingtypical characteristics such as the body con-tours and posture of a person standing upright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 73).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-cle by a partial application of the brakes if adanger of collision is detected. There may bea collision unless you brake yourself. Evenafter subsequent full application of the brakesa collision cannot always be avoided, partic-ularly when approaching at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes,the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the fullbraking pressure.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify objects and complex traffic conditions.

In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify people, especially if they are moving. Inthese cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot inter-vene. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you.

In order to maintain the appropriate distance tothe vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garages

Driving safety systems 73

Safety

Z

Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sunbeing low in the skyRdarknessRor if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti-vate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board com-puter (Y page 196).If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in themultifunction dis-play.

At or above a speed of approximately 4 mph(7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidlyapproach a vehicle in front. An intermittentwarning tone will then sound and the· dis-tance warning lamp will light up in the instru-ment cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front passenger have their seatbelts fastenedRthe vehicle speed is between approximately4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

i If there is an increased risk of a collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 56).

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking, upto the point of full brake application. Automaticemergency braking is not performed until imme-diately prior to an imminent accident.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is endedautomatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate with the SmartKey: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyonecan start the engine if a valid SmartKey has beenleft inside the vehicle.

74 Protection against theftSafety

i The immobilizer is always deactivated whenyou start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be started(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-tem is not operational. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey orKEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm systemis armed after approximately 15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-Key or KEYLESS-GO.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press theStart/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodX To stop the alarm with the SmartKey:press the% or& button on the Smart-Key.The alarm is stopped.

or

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 124).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is stopped.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle.The alarm is stopped.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-cle.The alarm is stopped.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you closethe open door that triggered it, for example.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-tem automatically notifies the CustomerAssistance Center. This is done either by textmessage or data connection.The emergency call system sends the mes-sage or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to thembrace service.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

Protection against theft 75

Safety

Z

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-netic fields. Otherwise, the remote controlfunction could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To unlock the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the% button.If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlocking andthree times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 199).When it is dark, the surround lighting also comeson if it is activated in the on-board computer(Y page 198).

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-LESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 125).

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry theSmartKey with you. You can combine the func-

76 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by usingKEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the& button on the SmartKey.When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance between the SmartKey and the cor-responding door handle must not be greaterthan 3 ft (1 m).A brief radio connection between the vehicleand the SmartKey determines whether a validSmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, thevehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen the external door handles are touchedRwhen starting the engineRwhile the vehicle is in motion

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-face:.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an extendedperiod.Further information on the convenience clos-ing feature (Y page 88).

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle onthe trunk lid.The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid.

Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use a SmartKey for anextended period of time, you can deactivate theKEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. TheSmartKey will then use very little power, therebyconserving battery power. For the purposes ofactivation/deactivation, the vehiclemust not benearby.

X To deactivate: press the& button on theSmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp of the SmartKey(Y page 79) flashes twice briefly and lightsup once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.

X To activate: press any button on the Smart-Key.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated featuresare available again.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the locking sys-tem. This means that only the driver's door andthe fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicleis unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travelalone.X To change the setting: press and hold downthe% and& buttons simultaneouslyfor approximately six seconds until the bat-tery check lamp (Y page 79) flashes twice.

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock: press the% button once.X To unlock centrally: press the% buttontwice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the driver'sdoor.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surfaceof the door handle on the front-passengerdoor or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: press andhold the% and& buttons simultane-ously for approximately six seconds until the

SmartKey 77

Openingandclosing

Z

battery check lamp (Y page 79) flashestwice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechani-cal key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch offthe alarm (Y page 75).If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-matically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of thearrow and at the same time remove mechan-ical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 83)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 86)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 83)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely into theSmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebatteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.

78 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 79).If the SmartKey battery is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 78).

X Press mechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow until bat-tery compartment cover: opens. Do nothold battery compartment cover: closedwhile doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth todo so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartmentcover: into the housing and then press toclose it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey(Y page 78).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons onthe vehicle.

SmartKey 79

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingthe SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if necessary(Y page 79).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 76).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if necessary(Y page 79).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using themechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of theSmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-trol function:X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

80 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using the Smart-Key.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 284).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 285).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.If the vehicle has previously been locked fromthe outside, opening a door from the inside willtrigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch offthe alarm (Y page 75).You can only open the rear doors from inside thevehicle if they are not secured by the child-prooflocks (Y page 63).

Doors 81

Openingandclosing

Z

X To unlock and open a front door: pull doorhandle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and opens.

X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking knobon the rear door.The rear door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a rear door: pull the rear door han-dle.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle fromthe inside. The switches are on the driver’s door.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be lockedor unlocked.If the vehicle has been locked from the outside,it cannot be centrally unlocked from the inside.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.

You can only open the rear doors from inside thevehicle if they are not secured by the child-prooflocks (Y page 63).If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-ton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the inside isunlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button: forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-ing.You could therefore lock yourself out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic locking func-tion on and off using the on-board computer(Y page 199).

82 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

Locking/unlocking driver's door withthe mechanical keyi If youwant to centrally lock the vehicle usingthe mechanical key, begin by pressing thelocking button for the interior locking mech-anism while the driver's door is open. Thenlock the driver's door using the mechanicalkey.

X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

X To lock: turn themechanical key clockwise asfar as it will go to position1.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 75).

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle

occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 328).You should preferably place luggage or loads inthe trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 242).Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.Vehicles without the trunk lid remote clos-ing feature: the trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRopened automatically from outsideRopened automatically from insideRlocked separatelyRopened with the emergency release buttonRunlocked with the mechanical keyVehicles with the trunk lid remote closingfeature: the trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRopened/closed automatically from outsideRopened/closed automatically from insideRlocked separatelyRopened with the emergency release buttonRunlocked with the mechanical key

Trunk lid reversing featureThe trunk lid is equipped with an automaticreversing feature. It reacts if a solid objectobstructs or restricts the trunk lid during theclosing procedure. The trunk lid opens againautomatically. The automatic reversing featureis only an aid and is not a substitute for yourattentiveness when closing the trunk.

Trunk 83

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not respond:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

The reversing feature cannot prevent some-one being trapped in these situations in par-ticular. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door orRpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid, orRpull on the trunk lid handle

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

X Press the% button on the SmartKey.X Pull handle:.X Raise the trunk lid.

Closing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess:.X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the&button on the SmartKey (Y page 76) or withKEYLESS-GO (Y page 76).

If KEYLESS-GOdetects only oneSmartKey in thetrunk after it closed, the trunk lid opens again. IfKEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out-side the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.Rpull the trunk lid handle

84 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 328).

OpeningYou can open the trunk lid automatically usingthe SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid.X Press and hold theF button on the Smart-Key until the trunk lid opens.

orX If the trunk is unlocked, pull the trunk lid han-dle and release it again immediately(Y page 84).

Closing

X Press closing button: in the trunk lid.Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture: you can simultaneously close the trunk lidand lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key mustbe in the rear detection range of the vehicle.X Press locking button; in the trunk lid.If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

If KEYLESS-GOdetects only oneSmartKey in thetrunk after it closed, the trunk lid opens again. IfKEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out-side the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.

Opening/closing automatically frominside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. In addi-tion, people may be standing in the closingarea or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil-dren, during the closing procedure. There is arisk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Release the remote operating switch imme-diately if somebody becomes trapped. To re-open the trunk lid, pull on the remote operat-ing switch.

G WARNINGThe trunk lid can be automatically opened orclosed even if the SmartKey is not in the vehi-cle. If children are left unsupervised in thevehicle, they could activate the functions.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

Trunk 85

Openingandclosing

Z

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 328).

Opening and closing

X To open: pull remote operating switch fortrunk lid: until the trunk lid opens.

X To close:press remote operating switch fortrunk lid: until the trunk lid is completelyclosed.

You can open and close the trunk lid from thedriver's seat when the vehicle is stationary andunlocked.

Unlocking the trunk! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the Smart-Key or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 75).X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 78).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key from position1counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi-tion2. Simultaneously pull the trunk lid han-dle.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.

Emergency release for the trunkYou can open the trunk lid from inside the vehi-cle with the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened withthe trunk lid emergency release when the vehi-cle is stationary or while driving.The trunk lid emergency release does not openthe trunk lid if the battery is disconnected ordischarged.Trunk lid emergency release light:REmergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.REmergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.

86 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts a side window during the closingprocess, the side window opens again automat-ically. However, the automatic reversing featureis only an aid and is not a substitute for yourattentiveness when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window again man-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are located onthe driver's door. There is also a switch on eachdoor for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open manually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

Side windows 87

Openingandclosing

Z

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull and hold the corre-sponding switch.

X To close fully: pull the corresponding switchbeyond the pressure point.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press/pull the switch beyond the point ofresistance, automatic operation is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stop auto-matic operation by pressing/pulling the switchagain.You can continue to operate the side windowsafter you switch off the engine or remove theSmartKey. This function is available for up to fiveminutes or until the driver's or front-passengerdoor is opened.When the override feature for the side windowsis activated, the side windows cannot be oper-ated from the rear (Y page 63).

Convenience opening

General notesYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carryout the following functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroofRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver'sseat

The convenience opening feature can only beoperated using the SmartKey. The SmartKeymust be in close proximity to the vehicle.The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-able when the vehicle is unlocked.

Convenience openingX Press and hold the% button until the sidewindows and the sliding sunroof are in thedesired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening: releasethe% button.

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notesInformation on the side window reversing fea-ture (Y page 87).

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:With the SmartKey:X Release the& button.X Press the% button until the side windowsand the sliding sunroof reopen.

With KEYLESS-GO:X Release the sensor surface on the door han-dle.

X Immediately pull and hold the door handleand keep the door handle pulled.The side windows and the sliding sunroofopen.

General notesWhen you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-ously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroof

Using the SmartKeyX VehicleswithoutKEYLESS-GO: point the tipof the SmartKey at the door handle on thedriver's door.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the SmartKeymust be in close proximity to the vehicle.

X Press and hold the& button until the sidewindows and the sliding sunroof are fullyclosed.

X Press and hold the& button until the sidewindows are fully closed.

88 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof are closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows areclosed.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releasethe& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe driver's door and the door at which the han-dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle. The gap betweenthe SmartKey and the corresponding door han-dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and thesliding sunroof are fully closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows are fullyclosed.i Make sure you only touch recessed sensorsurface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof are closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows areclosed.

X To interrupt convenience closing:releaserecessed sensor surface: on the door han-dle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 87).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch onthe door control panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 87).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the respective side window remains closedafter the button is released, then it has beenset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat thesteps above again.

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Side windows 89

Openingandclosing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

A side window cannot beclosed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannot beclosed and you cannotsee the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions mayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could bedamaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged ifwater enters the vehicle interior.

Resonance noises can occur in addition to theusual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof isopen. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side windowslightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts the sliding sunroof during the closingprocess, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-matically. However, the automatic reversingfeature is only an aid and is not a substitute foryour attentiveness when closing the sliding sun-roof.

90 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

: To raise; To open= To close/lower

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press the3 switch beyond the point ofresistance, an automatic opening/closing proc-ess is started in the corresponding direction.You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again. The automatic openingand raising feature is available only when thesliding sunroof is closed.The sun protection cover automatically opensalong with the sliding sunroof. You can open orclose the sun protection cover manually whenthe sliding sunroof is raised or closed.You can continue to operate the sliding sunroofafter switching off the engine or removing theSmartKey from the ignition lock. This functionremains active for five minutes or until you opena front door.

Resetting! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be openedor closed fully after resetting, contact a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not movesmoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear(Y page 91).

X Keep the3 switch pressed for anothersecond.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fullyopened and closed again (Y page 91).

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts

Sliding sunroof 91

Openingandclosing

Z

of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing processThe closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The sliding sunroof can-not be closed and youcannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again to thepoint of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and thenreopens slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again to thepoint of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-ture.

92 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

Observe the following when adjusting steeringwheel:, seat belt; and driver's seat=:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag aspossible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seatcushion.Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and youcan depress the pedals properly.Rthe back of your head is supported at eye levelby the center of the head restraint.Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly.

Ryou should have a good overview of trafficconditions.Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the bodyand is routed across the center of your shoul-der and across your hips in the pelvic area.

Further related subjects:RAdjusting the seats electrically (Y page 94).RAdjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 99).RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 44).RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exteriormirrors (Y page 101).RStoring the seat, steering wheel and exteriormirror settings using the memory function(Y page 104).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 46) and "Children in the Vehicle"(Y page 58).

Seats 93

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat heat-ing should also not be used to dry the seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.Do not place sharp objects on the seatcushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Theseats should only be occupied by passen-gers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating materi-

als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

i The head restraints in the front seats areinstalled with the NECK-PRO system(Y page 55). For this reason, it is not possibleto remove the head restraints from the frontseats.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

i Further related subjects:RRear bench seat through-loading feature(Y page 245)

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i If PRE-SAFE® is activated and the front-passenger seat is in an unfavorable position,it is moved to a better position.

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 104).

i Vehicles with the through-loading feature: ifyou fold down a rear seat backrest, therespective front seat is moved forwardsslightly if necessary. This prevents the seatsfrom colliding.

94 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front andrear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust theheight and angle of the head restraints to thecorrect position.Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust thehead restraint so that it is as close as possible toyour head.Observe the important safety notes regardingthe seats (Y page 93).

Adjusting the head restraint heightelectrically

X Slide switch for head restraint height adjust-ment: up or down in the direction of thearrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-handside bolster: into the desired position.

X To adjust the angle of the head restraint:push or pull the head restraint in the directionof arrow;.i Adjust the head restraint so that the back ofyour head is as close to the head restraint aspossible.

Rear seat head restraints

Important safety notesG WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraints so that they are asclose as possible to your head. This will

Seats 95

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

reduce the potential for injury to the head andneck in the event of an accident or similar sit-uation.Whenever the rear seats are occupied, onlydrive the vehicle with the head restraintsinstalled and engaged. Head restraints areintended to help reduce injuries during anaccident.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintangle

X Pull or push the top of the head restraint untilit is in the desired position.

Removing and installing the rear seathead restraintsG WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

! Make sure that the rear window roller sun-blind has been retracted before the rear headrestraints are removed. You could otherwisedamage the roller sunblind.

The head restraints can only be removed if therear seat folds forward.X To remove:press release catch: and pullthe head restraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint so thatthe notches on the bar are on the left whenviewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hear itengage in position.

Adjusting the multicontour seatThe multicontour seat function is only availablefor vehicles in Canada.

: To adjust the thigh cushion; To adjust the backrest contour in the lumbar

region= To adjust the backrest contour in the upper

back region? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back-

restYou can adjust the contour of the front seatindividually so as to provide optimum supportfor your back and sides.

96 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

Adjusting the active multicontourseatThe active multicontour seat is only available forthe driver's side.You can adjust the active multicontour seat viathe multimedia system (see the Digital Opera-tor's Manual).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contourYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimum sup-port for your back.

Seat heating and seat ventilation

Switching the seat heating on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

Rear seatsThe three red indicator lamps in the button indi-cate the heating level you have selected.Driver's and front-passenger seat: the sys-tem automatically switches down from level3 tolevel 2 after approximately eight minutes.Rear seat: the system automatically switchesdown from level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyfive minutes.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches off approx-imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 123).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

Seats 97

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Driver's and front-passenger seatThe three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selected.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 123).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and the slid-ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening"feature (Y page 88). The seat ventilation ofthe driver's seat automatically switches to thehighest level.

Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The seat heating or seatventilation has switchedoff prematurely or can-not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seatventilation can be switched back on manually.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

98 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the steering wheel electri-cally

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 100)RStoring settings (Y page 104)

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-tion of arrow: or;.Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch offthe ignition and open the driver's door, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.

i The steering wheel heating may switch offtemporarily if:Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior isabove 86 ‡ (30 †)Rthe temperature of the steering wheel isabove 95 ‡ (35 †)

Indicator lamp= remains on.

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The steering wheel heat-ing has switched off pre-maturely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel heatingwill switch back on automatically.

Steering wheel 99

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.Move the steering wheel adjustment lever ifthere is a risk of entrapment by the steeringwheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

You can stop the adjustment process by press-ing one of the memory function's position but-tons. This function is only available on vehicleswith the memory function (Y page 103).

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting inand out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer(Y page 199).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards when you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door;the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 must be inthe ignition lock (Y page 123).

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if ithas not already reached the upper stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selectedposition when:Rthe driver's door is closedRwith KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/Stopbutton onceorRwith the SmartKey:you insert the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock

When you close the driver's door with the igni-tion switched on, the steering wheel is alsoautomatically moved to the previously set posi-tion.The last position of the steering column is storedwhen you switch off the ignition or when youstore the setting with the memory function(Y page 104).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-gered in an accident, the steering column willmove upwardswhen the driver's door is opened.This occurs irrespective of the position of theSmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it eas-ier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is onlyoperational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 199).

100 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 123).

X Press button: for the left exterior mirror orbutton; for the right exterior mirror.The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-ton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again after sometime. You can adjust the selected exterior

mirror using button= as long as the indicatorlamp is lit.

X Press button= up, down, or to the right orleft until you have adjusted the exterior mirrorto the correct position. You should have agood overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger fieldof vision.After the engine has been started, the exteriormirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-dow defroster is switched on and the outsidetemperature is low. Heating takes amaximumoften minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 123).

X Briefly press:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-rior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must bereset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise notfold in when you switch on the "Fold in mirrorswhen locking" function in the on-board com-puter (Y page 200).

Mirrors 101

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Briefly press:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 200):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati-cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically folding exte-rior mirrors:manually move the exterior mir-ror into the correct position.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exteriormirrors: press and hold button: until youhear a click and then the mirror engaging inposition (Y page 101).The mirror housing is engaged again and youcan adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 101).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.

If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The exterior mirror on the driver's side and therear-view mirror automatically go into anti-glaremode if:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior lightingis switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking positionYou can set the front-passenger side exteriormirror such that you can see the rear wheel onthat side as soon as you engage reverse gear.You can store this position.

102 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Using reverse gear

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror; Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror= Button for the exterior mirror setting? Memory button MX Park the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror on thefront-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use button= to adjust the exterior mirror toa position that allows you to see the rearwheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to another posi-tion, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.

Using the memory buttonYou can store the parking position of the exte-rior mirror on the front-passenger side usingmemory buttonM?. The reverse gearmust notbe engaged.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X When the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side is active, press button= toadjust the exterior mirror. In the exterior mir-ror, the rear wheel and the curb should bevisible.

X Press memory button M? and one of thearrows on button= within three seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthese steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Select the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side by pressing button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger sidemoves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exterior mirroron the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-

Memory function 103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

The memory function can be used at any time,e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the igni-tion lock.

Storing settingsWith the memory function, you can store up tothree different settings, e.g. for three differentpeople.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRactive multicontour seat: seat contour,dynamic function levelRdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrorson the driver's and front-passenger sides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 94).X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel(Y page 99) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 101).

X Pressmemory buttonM and then press one ofthe memory position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected presetposition. A tone sounds when the settingshave been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant memory positionswitch 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering wheeland exteriormirrors are in the stored position.i The setting procedure is interrupted as soonas you release the storage position button.

104 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Exterior lighting

General notesUSA only: if you wish to drive during the daytimewithout lights, switch off the Daytime run‐ning lamps function via the on-board computer(Y page 198).

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switch (Y page 105)Rthe combination switch (Y page 106)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 198)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlampmode, controlled

by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0 in the ignition lock

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-ing at all times.Ã is the favored light switch position.The light setting is automatically selectedaccording to the brightness of the ambient light,but not in the event of poor visibility due toweather conditions such as fog, snow or spray.RWith the SmartKey in position 1 in the ignitionlock: the parking lamps are switched on/offautomatically depending on the brightness ofthe ambient light.RIf you have switched on the Daytime run‐ning lamps function in the on-board com-puter, the daytime running lamps or the park-ing lamps and low-beam headlamps areswitched on or off automatically while theengine is running, depending on the bright-ness of the ambient light.

X To switch on the automatic headlamps:turn the light switch to theà position.

Canada only: the daytime running lampsimprove the visibility of your vehicle during theday. The daytime running lamps function isrequired by law in Canada. It cannot thereforebe deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever from adriving position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low beam headlamps go out after threeminutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn thelight switch to the T position, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to theL position, themanual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Exterior lighting 105

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

USA only: the daytime running lamps improvethe visibility of your vehicle during the day. To dothis, the Daytime running lamps functionmust be switched on using the on-board com-puter (Y page 198).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to the T or L position, the manualsettings take precedence over the daytime run-ning lamps.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Even if the light sensor does not detect that it isdark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps switch onwhen the ignition is switched onand the light switch is set to the L position.This is a particularly useful function in the eventof rain and fog.X To switch on the low beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-tion 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L position.The green L indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps! If the battery charge is very low, the parkinglamps or standing lamps are automaticallyswitched off to enable the next engine start.Always park your vehicle safely and in awell litarea, in accordance with the relevant legalstipulations. Avoid using the T parkinglamps over a period of several hours. If pos-sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-hand W standing lamps.

X To switch on the parking lamps: turn thelight switch to the T position.The green T indicator lamp on the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: turn theSmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock orremove the SmartKey.

X Turn the light switch to the W (left-handside of the vehicle) orX (right-hand side ofthe vehicle) position.

Combination switch

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the direction ofarrow; or?.

X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:turn the light switch to the L orÃposition.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are switched on onlywhen it is dark andthe engine is running.

106 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The blue K indicator lamp on the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:move the combination switch back to its nor-mal position.The blue K indicator lamp on the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: ifAdaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it auto-matically controls activation and deactivation ofthe high-beam headlamps (Y page 107).X High-beam flasher: pull the combinationswitch in the direction of arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch the hazard warning lamps on oroff: press button:.The turn signal lamps flash when the hazardwarning lamps are switched on. If you nowswitch on a turn signal lamp using the com-bination switch, only the turn signal lamp onthe corresponding side of the vehicle willflash.

The hazard warning lamps switch on automati-cally if an air bag is deployed.The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Cornering light functionThe cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better visi-bility in tight bends, for example. It can only beactivated when the low-beam headlamps areswitched on.

Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turnthe steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off after nomore than three minutes.Cornering light function with traffic circlefunction:The cornering light function is activated on bothsides before entering a traffic circle through anevaluation of the current GPS position of thevehicle. It remains active until after the vehiclehas left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrianscrossing the road, for example, are illuminatedby your vehicle in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notesYou can use this function to set the headlampsto change between low beam and high beamautomatically. The system recognizes vehicleswith their lights on, either approaching from theopposite direction or traveling in front of yourvehicle, and consequently switches the head-lamps from high beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beamheadlamp range depending on the distance tothe other vehicle. Once the system no longerdetects any other vehicles, it reactivates thehigh-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierOn very rare occasions, Adaptive HighbeamAssist may fail to recognize other road usersthat have lights, or may recognize them too

Exterior lighting 107

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac-tivated orwill be activated regardless. There isa risk of an accident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive HighbeamAssist is only an aid. You areresponsible for adjusting the vehicle's lightingto the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-ditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain or snowRthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensors

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To switch on: turn the light switch to theà position.

X Press the combination switch forwardsbeyond the pressure point (Y page 106).The _ indicator lamp in the multifunctiondisplay lights up when it is dark and the lightsensor switches on the low-beam headlamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between the vehi-cle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other roadusers have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16mph (25 km/h) or other road usershave been detected or the roads are ade-quately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-

cator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off:move the combination switchback to its normal position or move the lightswitch to another position.The K indicator lamp on the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality of theheadlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: u Switches the rear compartment inte-rior lighting on/off

; | Switches the automatic interior light-ing control on/off

= p Switches the right-hand front readinglamp on/off

? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off

A p Switches the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

108 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Rear-compartment overhead controlpanel

: p Switches the right-hand reading lampon/off

; p Switches the left-hand reading lampon/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept for when the SmartKey is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.The color and brightness of the ambient lightingmay be set using the on-board computer(Y page 198).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on or off: press the | button.When the automatic interior lighting control isactivated, the button is flush with the over-head control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on ifyou:Runlock the vehicleRopen a door.Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. You can activate this delayed switch-offusing the on-board computer (Y page 199).

Replacing bulbs

The front and rear light clusters of your vehicleare equipped with LED light bulbs. Do notreplace the LED light sources of your vehicleyourself. Contact a qualified specialist work-shop which has the necessary specialist knowl-edge and tools to carry out the work required.Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.You must therefore make sure that these func-tion correctly at all times. Have the headlampsetting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wipers whenthe windshield is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-lected on thewindshield can scratch the glassif wiping takes place when the windshield isdry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always usewasher fluid when operating the windshieldwipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on thewindshield after the vehicle has been washedin an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-dues may be the reason for this. Clean thewindshield using washer fluid after washingthe vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due tooptical influences and the windshield becom-ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.This could then damage the windshield wiperblades or scratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switch offthe windshield wipers in dry weather.

Windshield wipers 109

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set

to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe

î To wipe with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä orÅ position, the appropriatewiping frequencyis automatically set according to the intensity ofthe rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor ismore sensitive than in the Ä position, caus-ing the windshield wiper to wipe more fre-quently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield willno longer be wiped properly. This could preventyou from observing the traffic conditions.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.

Never fold a windshield wiper arm without awiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewindshield wiper arm without a wiper bladeand it falls onto thewindshield, thewindshieldmay be damaged by the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, makesure that you touch only the wiper arm of thewiper.

Replacing the wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

X Firmly press release knob: and pull thewiper blade upwards from the wiper arm inthe direction of the arrow.

Installing the wiper bladesX Position newwiper blade: in the retainer onthe wiper arm and slide it into place in theopposite direction of the arrow.The wiper blade audibly engages.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

110 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windshield wiper move-ment. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as theSmartKey having been removed.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spray noz-zles no longer hits thecenter of the windshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.

Windshield wipers 111

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on the fol-lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fogup.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature andthe humidity in the vehicle interior and filtersundesirable substances out of the air.Climate control can only be operated when theengine is running. Optimum operation is onlyachievedwith the side windows and roof closed.The residual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switched off(Y page 120).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period duringwarm weather, e.g. using the convenienceopening feature (Y page 88). This will speedup the cooling process and the desired inte-rior temperature will be reached morequickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most parti-cles of dust and soot and completely filtersout pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutantsand odors. A clogged filter reduces theamount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.For this reason, you should always observethe interval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-let.

i It is possible that the residual heat functionmay be activated automatically an hour afterthe SmartKey is removed. The vehicle is thenventilated for 30minutes to dry the automaticclimate control.

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 117); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 118)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 117)

112 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)D Setting the air distribution (Y page 118)E Increases the airflow (Y page 118)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)G Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116)H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117)

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 117); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 119)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 117)C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 118)E Increases the airflow (Y page 118)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)G Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116)H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117)

Overview of climate control systems 113

Climatecontrol

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Canada onlyFront control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 117); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)= Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 120)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 117)C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 118)D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116)E Sets the air distribution (Y page 118)F Increases the airflow (Y page 118)G Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)H Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 117)I Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117)

Rear control panelK Increases the airflow (Y page 118)L Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)M DisplayN Reduces the temperature (Y page 117)O Increases the temperature (Y page 117)

114 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

USA onlyFront control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 117); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 119)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 117)C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 118)D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116)E Sets the air distribution (Y page 118)F Increases the airflow (Y page 118)G Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)H Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 117)I Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117)

Rear control panelK Increases the airflow (Y page 118)L Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)M DisplayN Reduces the temperature (Y page 117)O Increases the temperature (Y page 117)

Optimum use of automatic climatecontrol

Climate control systemBelow, you can find a number of notes and rec-ommendations to help you use climate controloptimally.

RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above theà and¿ buttons light up.RIn automaticmode, you can also use theñbutton to set the climate mode (FOCUS,MEDIUM or DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level isrecommended.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

Overview of climate control systems 115

Climatecontrol

ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" functionbriefly until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. Thewindows could otherwise fog up,since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temper-ature settings on the driver's side for thefront-passenger side and the rear compart-ment as well. The indicator lamp above theá button goes out.RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate con-trol: use the residual heat function if you wantto heat or ventilate the vehicle interior whenthe ignition is switched off. The residual heatfunction can only be activated or deactivatedwith the ignition switched off.RIf you change the settings of the climate con-trol system, the climate status displayappears for approximately three seconds atthe bottom of the screen in the multimediasystem display. You will see the current set-tings of the various climate control functions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the climatecontrol system only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control output,you can switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button (Y page 127).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Activating/deactivating climate con-trol

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, the airsupply and air circulation are also switched off.The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch offclimate control only briefly

i Activate climate control primarily using theà button (Y page 117).

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-matic mode.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will notbe cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up morequickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The airinside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normaland not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button lights up.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionhas a delayed switch-off feature.

116 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lamp in the¿ button flashesthree times or remainsoff. The "Cooling with airdehumidification" func-tion cannot be switchedon.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automaticmode, the set temperature ismain-tained automatically at a constant level. Thesystemautomatically regulates the temperatureof the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-tribution.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis activated automatically in automatic mode.

Automatic controlX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Set the desired temperature.X To switch on: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airflow areactivated.

3-zone automatic climate control: when auto-matic mode is activated, you can set the climatemode (Y page 117).X To switch to manual mode:press the_button.

orX Press theI orK button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout.

Adjusting the climate mode settingsThe "Set climatemode" function is only availablewith 3-zone automatic climate control.

You can select the following climate mode set-tings in automatic mode:FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler settingMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-

free settingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Press theà button.X Press theñ button repeatedly until thedesired climate mode appears in the display.

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for the driv-er's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X To increase or reduce: turn temperaturecontrol: orB counter-clockwise or clock-wise (Y page 112).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate controlYou can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswellas for the rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X To increase or reduce the temperature inthe front compartment:turn temperaturecontrol: orB counter-clockwise or clock-wise (Y page 114).

Operating the climate control systems 117

Climatecontrol

Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase or reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the front con-trol panel:press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.The temperature setting for the driver's sideis adopted for the rear compartment and thefront-passenger side.

X Turn temperature control: counter-clock-wise or clockwise (Y page 114).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase or reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the rear con-trol panel:press ther ors button onthe rear control panel.Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsP Directs air through the center and side air

ventsO Directs air through the footwell air ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Directs the airflow through the defroster,

center and side air vents (Canada only)a Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents_ Directs the airflow through the defroster

vents, the center and side air vents aswell as the footwell air vents (Canadaonly)

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the side airvents. The side air vents can only be closedwhen the controls on the side air vents areturned downwards.

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.

Setting the airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X To increase: press theK button.X To reduce: press theI button.

i You can use 3-zone automatic climate con-trol to set the airflow in the rear compartmentseparately.

If the battery is not sufficiently charged, bloweroutput may be reduced. As soon as the batteryis sufficiently charged, full blower output will beavailable.

Switching the ZONE function on/offX To activate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup.Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is notadopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is notadopted for the front-passenger side and therear compartment.

X To deactivate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is adop-ted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is adop-ted for the front-passenger side and the rearcompartment.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or sidewindows on the inside.

118 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" functionas soon as the windshield is clear again.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield and frontside windowsRair-recirculation mode off

If the battery is not sufficiently charged, bloweroutput may be reduced. Once the battery is suf-ficiently charged again, full blower output will beavailable again.X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

MAX COOL maximum coolingTheMAX COOL function is only available in vehi-cles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when the engineis running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in theÙ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in theÙ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

When you activate MAX COOL, the followingfunctions are also activated:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the¿ cooling with air dehumidi-fication function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X Adjust the side air vents so that the warmedair is directed to the side windows.

X If thewindows continue to fog up, activate the"windshield defrosting" function¬.i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Press the_ button repeatedly until theP orO symbol appears in the display.

X Adjust the side air vents so that no air isdirected to the side windows.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off as soonas the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rearwindow defroster switches off automaticallyafter several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear windowdefroster may switch off.

Activating or deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

Operating the climate control systems 119

Climatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defrostercan be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehicle fromoutside. The air already inside the vehicle willthen be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-dows can fog up more quickly, in particular atlow temperatures. Only use air-recirculationmode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-ging up.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X To activate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button lightsup.

Dual-zone automatic climate control: air-recir-culation mode is automatically activated at highoutside temperatures.3-zone automatic climate control: air-recircula-tion mode is automatically activated at high lev-els of pollution or at high outside temperatures.When air-recirculation mode is activated auto-matically, the indicator lamp above thegbutton does not light up. Outside air is addedafter approximately 30 minutes.X To deactivate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button goesout.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-cally:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡(5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notesThe residual heat function is only available with3-zone automatic climate control.It is possible to make use of the residual heat ofthe engine to continue heating the vehicle forapproximately 30 minutes after the engine hasbeen switched off. The heating time depends onthe set interior temperature.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 123).

X To switch on: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button lightsup.

If the residual heat function is activated, thewindows may fog up on the inside.The blower will run at a low speed regardless ofthe airflow setting.If you activate the residual heat function at hightemperatures, only the ventilation will be acti-vated. The blower runs at medium speed.

120 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

X To switch off: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button goesout.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield andthe hood free of blockages, such as ice, snowor leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles inthe vehicle interior.

Setting the air ventsAir vents are located:Ron the left and right-hand side of the dash-boardRin the middle of the dashboardRin the glove boxRin the rear-compartment center console

Example: Defroster vent; Side air vent= Thumbwheel for side air ventX To open or close: turn thumbwheel= up ordown.

Adjust the rear air vents and the air vent in theglove box (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Air vents 121

Climatecontrol

Z

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and drivingsafety systems adjusts automatically while acertain distance is being driven after the vehiclehas been delivered or after repairs. Full systemeffectiveness is not reached until the end of thisteach-in procedure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with its per-formance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicleand engine speeds for the first 1000 miles(1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle isÔ of the way to the red areaof the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brakethe vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the point of resistance (kickdown).

Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and accelerate thevehicle to full speed.You should also observe these notes on break-ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train onyour vehicle have been replaced.Always observe the respective maximum per-missible speed.

Self-locking rear axle differential(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking dif-ferential on the rear axle.Change the oil to improve protection of the rearaxle differential:Rafter a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles(3,000 km)Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or 3 yearsThese oil changes prolong the service life of thedifferential. Have the oil change carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brake

122 DrivingDrivingandparking

boosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehiclestationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid highengine speeds and driving at full throttle untilthe engine has reached its operating temper-ature.Only shift the automatic transmission to thedesired drive position when the vehicle is sta-tionary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the max-imum engine speed is restricted in order toprotect the engine. To protect the engine andmaintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv-ing at full throttle when the engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey(shift the transmission to position P)

1 Power supply for some consumers, such asthe windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignitionlock even if it is not the correct SmartKey forthe vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped withSmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-ton.The Start/Stop button must be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle.When you insert the Start/Stop button into theignition lock, the system needs approximatelytwo seconds recognition time. You can then usethe Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button several times insuccession corresponds to the different Smart-Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only thecase if you are not depressing the brake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example, whenstarting the engine.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock.Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 76).

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO.

Driving 123

Drivingandparking

Z

If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryouwill not be able to start the enginewith theStart/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

The engine can be switched off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This functionoperates independently of the ECO start/stopautomatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. Indicator and warning lamps, see(Y page 226).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the SmartKeybeing removed from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You can nowactivate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stopbutton: twice.The ignition is switched on.If you press Start/Stop button: once whenin this position, the ignition is deactivatedagain.

Removing the Start/Stop buttonYou can remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock and start the vehicle as normalusing the SmartKey.It is only possible to switch between Start/Stopbutton mode and SmartKey operation when thetransmission is in position P.X Remove Start/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-ton from the ignition lock when you leave thevehicle. You should, however, always take theSmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. Aslong as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment can beoperated

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

124 DrivingDrivingandparking

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

General notesi The catalytic converter is preheated for upto 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.The transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display shows P.

i You can start the engine in transmissionposition P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyi To start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stopbutton out of the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the ignitionlock (Ypage123) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the enginei The Start/Stop button can be used to startthe vehicle manually without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignitionlock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.This mode for starting the engine operatesindependently of the ECO start/stop auto-matic engine start function.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 123).The engine starts.

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! If a warning tone sounds and the ReleasePark. Brake message appears in the multi-function display, the parking brake is stillapplied. Release the parking brake.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pullingaway.The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 199).It is only possible to shift the transmission fromposition P to the desired position if you depressthe brake pedal. If the brake pedal is notdepressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still bemoved but the parking lock remains engaged.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speedsafter a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-verter to reach its operating temperaturemore quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling away for-wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holdsthe vehicle for a short time after you haveremoved your foot from the brake pedal. Thisgives you enough time to move your foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and todepress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

Driving 125

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stoppedunder certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when the driverwants to pull away again. The ECO start/stopfunction thereby helps you to reduce the fuelconsumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayThe ECO start/stop function is activated whenyou start the engine.If the engine has been switched off automati-cally by the ECO start/stop function, the¤symbol is shown in the multifunction display.Mercedes-AMGvehicles: the AMGmenu in themultifunction display additionally shows theStop/Start active message.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stopfunction is only available in drive program C.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera-ture.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is notfogged upwhen the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is stopped automatically.

i The HOLD function can also be activated ifthe engine has been switched off automati-cally. It is then not necessary to continueapplying the brakes during the automatic stopphase. When you depress the accelerator

126 DrivingDrivingandparking

pedal, the engine starts automatically and thebraking effect of the HOLD function is deac-tivated.

Automatic engine switch-off can take place amaximumof four times in a row (initial stop, thenthree subsequent stops).Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-secutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi-ted.All other models: automatic engine switch-offcan take place amaximum of four times in a row(initial switch-off, then three subsequent switch-offs).

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function bypressing the ECO buttonRin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and theHOLD function is notactiveRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou move the transmission out of position PRyou switch to drive program S, S+ or M(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-er's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too low

i Shifting the transmission to position P doesnot start the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECOstart/stop function

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

X To deactivate: in drive programC, press ECObutton:.

orX Switch to drive program S, S+ orM(Y page 134).Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.If drive program S, S+ orM is active, the auto-matic transmission switches to drive programC.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will thennot be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.

All other models

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

Driving 127

Drivingandparking

Z

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will then

not be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine does notstart.

The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 157) or DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 155).

X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 124). Avoid excessively longand frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain thebattery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 285).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the startermotor to cool down for approximately twominutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

128 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine is not runningsmoothly and is misfir-ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converterand damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The coolant temperaturegauge shows a valueabove 248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is nolonger being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 268). Observe the warning notesas you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

Transmission position and drive pro-gram displayThe current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.

Automatic transmission 129

Drivingandparking

Z

: Transmission position display; Drive program displayAdditionally, displays next to the selector levermark the current transmission position.The indicators light up when the Smartkey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicators goout when the Smartkey is removed from theignition lock.If the transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display is not working, you should pullaway carefully to check whether the desiredtransmission position is engaged. Ideally, youshould select transmission position D and driveprogram C or S.

Engaging park position P

X When the vehicle is stationary, press but-ton:.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to itsoriginal position. The current transmission posi-tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmissionposition display in the multifunction display(Y page 130).

Transmission position and drive pro-gram displayThe current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position display; Drive program displayThe arrows in the transmission position displayshowhowand intowhich transmission positionsyou can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.If the transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display is not working, you should pullaway carefully to check whether the desiredtransmission position is engaged. Ideally, youshould select transmission position D and driveprogram E or S.

130 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Engaging park position P! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicleis moving, do not shift the automatic trans-mission directly from D to R, from R to D ordirectly to P. The automatic transmissioncould otherwise be damaged.

X Push theDIRECTSELECT lever in the directionof arrow P.Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.

Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECTSELECT lever up or down disengages the park-ing lock. The transmission is in N neutral.In order to shift frompark positionP directly intoR or D:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downpast the first point of resistance

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the Smartkeyand remove the SmartKeyRyou switch off the engine using the Smartkeyor using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door or front-passenger doorRthe driver's door is openedwhen the vehicle isstationary or driving at very low speed and thetransmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-mission shifts automatically to transmissionposition P if the HOLD function or DISTRONICPLUS is activated. Observe the information onthe HOLD function (Y page 158) and onDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 153).

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up past the first point of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-

tion on the ECO start/stop function(Y page 126).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up or down to the first point of resist-ance.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.With the Smartkey: if you then open the driv-er's door or the front-passenger door or removethe Smartkey from the ignition, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.WithKEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver'sor front-passenger door, the automatic trans-mission shifts to P.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:

Automatic transmission 131

Drivingandparking

Z

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock.

X Insert the Smartkey into the ignition lock.X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smartkeyin the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever down past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever down past the first point of resistance.

Transmission positions

B Park positionOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion P when the vehicle is stationary(Y page 142). The parking lockshould not be used as a brake whenparking. Always apply the parkingbrake in addition to the parking lockin order to secure the vehicle.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunc-tioning, the transmission may belocked in position P. Have the vehicleelectronics checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.Park position P is automaticallyengaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using theSmartKey and remove the Smart-KeyRyou switch off the engine using theSmartKey or using the Start/Stopbutton and open the driver's dooror front-passenger doorRthe driver's door is opened whenthe vehicle is stationary or drivingat very low speed and the trans-mission is in position D or R

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion R when the vehicle is stationary.

132 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow you tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. to pushit or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shiftthe transmission only to position N ifthe vehicle is in danger of skidding,e.g. on icy roads.If you switch the engine off with thetransmission in position R or D, theautomatic transmission shifts to Nautomatically.

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear automatically. All forward gearsare available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shiftingbehavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive programRthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

Mercedes-AMG vehiclesWhen shifting down, the double-clutch functionis active regardless of the currently selecteddrive program. The double-clutch function

reduces load change reactions and is conduciveto a sporty driving style. The sound generated bythe double-clutch function depends on the driveprogram selected.

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting back andforth between transmission positions D and Rcan help to free a vehicle that has become stuckin mud or snow. The vehicle's engine manage-ment restricts switching between transmissionpositionsD and R to speeds up to amaximum of5mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth betweentransmission positions D and R, move theDIRECT SELECT lever up and down past thepoint of resistance.

Program selector button

General notes

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles andvehicles with AMG sports package)X Press program selector button: repeatedlyuntil the letter for the desired drive programappears in the multifunction display.

Automatic transmission 133

Drivingandparking

Z

Vehicles with the AMG Sports packageX Press program selector button: repeatedlyuntil the letter for the desired drive programappears in the multifunction display.

The program selector button allows you tochoose between different driving characteris-tics.

i Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 136).As well as this permanent drive program M,you can also activate temporary drive pro-gram M (Y page 135).

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 135).

i The automatic transmission shifts to auto-matic drive program E each time the engine isstarted.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Drive program selector with manual drive programX Turn drive program selector: until thedesired drive program appears in the multi-function display in the speedometer.The drive program indicator on drive programselector: lights up in red.

i Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 136).As well as this permanent drive program M,you can also activate temporary drive pro-gram M (Y page 135).

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

S+ SportPlus Particularly sporty drivingstyle

M Manual Manual gear shifting

RS RACESTART

Optimal vehicle accelera-tion from a standstill

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 135).

i The automatic transmission shifts to auto-matic drive programC each time the engine isstarted.

i RS cannot be selected during normal driv-ing. For further information on RACE START,see (Y page 158).

134 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Steering wheel paddle shifters

In the manual drive program, you can changegears manually using steering wheel paddleshifters: and;.Further information about permanent drive pro-gram M (Y page 136).Further information about temporary drive pro-gram M (Y page 135).

i You can only change gear with the steeringwheel paddle shifters when the transmissionis in position D.

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive program E (C)Drive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic trans-mission settings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forwardand reverse gears, unless the acceleratorpedal is depressed fully.Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, forexample on slippery road surfaces.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle being drivenat lower engine speeds and the wheels beingless likely to spin.

Automatic drive program SDrive program S (or, in the case of Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive programs S and S+) is char-acterized by the following:Rsporty engine and automatic transmissionsettings.Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.The fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.

Manual drive program M

General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheel paddleshifters. The transmissionmust be in positionD.You can activate manual drive program M inautomatic drive programs E, C and S.Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles withAMG sports package: as well as temporarydrive program M you can also activate perma-nent drive program M (Y page 133).Further information about permanent drive pro-gram M (Y page 136).

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 135).Manual drive program M is temporarily acti-vated. Themultifunction display showsM andthe selected gear.

Shifting gearsIf you pull on the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter, the automatic transmissionswitches to manual drive program M for a limi-ted amount of time. In cases where it is permis-sible, the automatic transmission shifts up ordown to the next gear.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheelpaddle shifter (Y page 135).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.i If the maximum engine speed on the cur-rently engaged gear is reached and you con-tinue to accelerate, the automatic transmis-

Automatic transmission 135

Drivingandparking

Z

sion automatically shifts up in order to pre-vent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 135).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.i Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The mul-tifunction display shows you the recommendedgear.X Shift to recommended gear; according togearshift recommendation: when shown inthe multifunction display.

DeactivatingIf you have activatedmanual drive programM, itwill remain active for a certain amount of time.Under certain conditions the minimum amountof time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateralacceleration, during an overrun phase or whendriving on steep terrain.If manual drive program M has been deactiva-ted, the automatic transmission shifts into theautomatic drive program that was last selected,i.e. E, C or S.You can also deactivate manual drive programM yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter and hold it in place (Y page 135).

orX Switch the transmission position.

RAll vehicles exceptMercedes-AMG vehi-cles: use the DIRECT SELECT lever(Y page 130)RMercedes-AMG vehicles: use the lever(Y page 129)

orX Change the drive program.RAll vehicles exceptMercedes-AMG vehi-cles: use the drive program selector button(Y page 133)RMercedes-AMG vehicles: use the driveprogram selector (Y page 134)

Manual drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with theAMG sports package)

General notesIn this drive program, you can permanentlychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust bein position D.As well as this permanent drive programM, youcan also activate temporary drive program M(Y page 135).

Switching on the manual drive programX All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles: press the program selector buttonrepeatedly until drive program M appears inthe multifunction display (Y page 133).

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn the drive pro-gram selector until drive program M appearsin the multifunction display (Y page 134).The indicatorM on the drive program selectorlights up in red.

Manual drive program M is different from driveprograms S and S+ with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.Inmanual drive programM, you can change gearusing the steering wheel paddle shifters if thetransmission is in position D. The multifunctiondisplay shows the selected and engaged gear.

136 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

UpshiftingX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles! In manual drive program M, the automatictransmission does not shift up automaticallyeven when the engine limiting speed for thecurrent gear is reached. When the engine lim-iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut toprevent the engine from overrevving. Alwaysmake sure that the engine speed does notreach the red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicatorBefore the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-function display.X When the UP message appears in the multi-function display, pull on the right-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-

ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X If corresponding gearshift recommenda-tion: appears in the multifunction displayon the instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter(Y page 135).The automatic transmission shifts to recom-mended gear;.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you brake the vehicle or stopwithout shift-ing down, the automatic transmission willshift down to a gear that will allow the vehicleto accelerate or pull away again.

For maximum acceleration, pull the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter until the transmis-sion selects the optimum gear for the currentspeed.

KickdownYou can also use kickdown for maximum accel-eration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles:it is not possible touse kickdown in manual drive program M.

Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 133).

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn the drive pro-gram selector (Y page 134).

Automatic transmission 137

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

7G-TRONIC:The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

9G-TRONIC:The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is inposition N.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

Transfer caseThis section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-mitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake systemor transfer case could otherwise be damaged.Contact a qualified specialist workshop for aperformance test.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.

138 RefuelingDrivingandparking

You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection systemcould otherwise be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic chargecould build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray outwhen the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 324).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 138).The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-matically when you unlock or lock the vehiclewith the SmartKey or using KEYLESS-GO.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed inthe instrument cluster8. The arrow next tothe filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueledX Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock (Y page 123).

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

Refueling 139

Drivingandparking

Z

X Open the fuel filler flap fully.X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on theinside of fuel filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in place andrefuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stopsfilling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leakout.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-cle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the centrallocking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing.If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-sage appears in the multifunction display(Y page 215).

Fuel filler flap emergency release

X Open the trunk lid.X Slide down the parcel net.X Open the right-hand side trim panel.X Detach the emergency release fromretainer:.

X Pull the emergency release in the direction ofarrow;.The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

X Open the fuel filler flap.

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as theSmartKey having been removed.

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannotbe opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 76).

140 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 78).X Open the trunk lid.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release(Y page 140).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly againstrolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmissionmust be in positionP and theSmartkey must be removed from the ignitionlock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towards thecurb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the parking brake firmly.X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): shift the transmission to position P.

Parking 141

Drivingandparking

Z

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: when the vehicleis stationary, press button:.

X With the Smartkey: turn the Smartkey toposition 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GOStart/Stop button (Y page 123).The engine stops and all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this corre-sponds to Smartkey position 1. When thedriver's door is open, this corresponds toSmartkey position 0: "Smartkey removed".

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.With the Smartkey: if you then open the driv-er's door or the front-passenger door or removethe Smartkey from the ignition, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.WithKEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver'sor front-passenger door, the automatic trans-mission shifts to P.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock.

X Insert the Smartkey into the ignition lock.X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smartkeyin the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for about three seconds. This func-tion operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake,the brake lamps will not light up.

142 ParkingDrivingandparking

X To apply: depress parking brake; firmly.When the engine is running, the$ (USAonly) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamplights up in the instrument cluster.

X To release: depress the brake pedal and keepit depressed.

X Pull release handle:.When the ignition is switched on or the engineis running, the$ (USA only) orJ (Can-ada only) indicator lampgoes out in the instru-ment cluster.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than sixweeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seekadvice.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryin which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-hibit the driver from using a mobile phone whiledriving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers adistance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-ommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are not needed.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-play.

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-rain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Driving tips 143

Drivingandparking

Z

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance with themanufacturer's specifications. Always havework on the engine carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-related systemsmust be carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.The engine settings must not be changed underany circumstances. Furthermore, all specificservice work must be carried out at regularintervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

The ECO display provides feedback on how eco-nomical your driving characteristics are. TheECO display assists you in achieving the mosteconomical driving style for the selected set-tings and prevailing conditions. Your drivingstyle can significantly influence the vehicle'sconsumption.The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationRConstantRCoasting

The percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and the mean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higher percentageindicates a more economical driving style.The ECOdisplay does not indicate the actual fuelconsumption. A fixed percentage count in theECO display does not indicate a fixed consump-tion.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style is carried outusing the following three categories:RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstant (assessment of driving behavior atall times):- The bar fills up: constant speed and avoid-ance of unnecessary acceleration anddeceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keep-ing your distance and early release of theaccelerator. The vehicle can coast withoutuse of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate engine speeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAcceleration and Constant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.

i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for Constantwillchange.

i The ECO display summarizes the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journey toits completion. For this reason, the bars

144 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

change dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there are fewerchanges. For more dynamic changes, carryout a manual reset.

For further information on the ECO display, see(Y page 191).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting to alower gear in good time. This allows you totake advantage of the engine's braking effect.This helps you to avoid overheating thebrakes and wearing them out excessively.When you take advantage of engine braking, adrive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.on a slippery road surface. This could causedamage to the drive train. This type of damageis not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-ranty.

Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is especiallyimportant if the vehicle is laden.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows the airflowto cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayed reac-tion from the brakes when braking for the firsttime. This may also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehiclewashed, brake firmly while paying attention tothe traffic conditions. This will warm up thebrake discs, thereby drying them more quicklyand protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-due may form on the brake discs and brakepads. This can result in a significantly longerbraking distance.RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply thebrakes occasionally while paying attention tothe traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster andRyou hear a warning tone while the engine isrunning

Observe additional warning messages in themultifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.

Driving tips 145

Drivingandparking

Z

Have the brake system checked immediately.Consult a qualified specialist workshop toarrange this.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-formance testsmay only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate thevehicle on such a dynamometer, please con-sult a qualified specialist workshop inadvance. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys-tem operates automatically, the engine andthe ignitionmust be switched off (SmartKey inposition 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) while the park-ing brake is being tested on a brake dyna-mometer.Braking maneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP®may seriously damage the brake sys-tem.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys-tem operates automatically, the engine andthe ignition system must be switched off(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignitionlock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1)when:Rtesting the parking brake on a brake dyna-mometer.Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed withone of the axles raised.

Braking maneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP®may seriously damage the brake sys-tem.

All checks and maintenance work on the brakesystem must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the functional-ity of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so,press firmly on the brake pedal when driving at ahigh speed. This improves the grip of the brakepads.You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)on (Y page 65) or of BAS PLUS on (Y page 65).

The braking characteristics of the vehicle can beseriously impaired if:Rbrake pads other than those recommendedare installedRthe recommended brake fluid is not usedSafe braking can no longer be guaranteed.

AMG high-performance and ceramicbrakesThe high-performance brake system is onlyinstalled on the Mercedes-AMGCLS 63 S 4MATIC model.The AMG brake systems are designed for heavyloads. This may lead to noise when braking. Thiswill depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as tempera-ture and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brakesystem, such as the brake pads/linings or brakediscs, depends on the individual driving styleand operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-age that will be valid under all circumstances. Anaggressive driving style will lead to high wear.You can obtain further information about thisfrom your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving andbraking accordingly during this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wearwarning lamp in the instrument cluster and noteany brake status messages in the multifunctiondisplay. Especially for high performance driving,it is important to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

146 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depth onthe road surface, there is a danger of hydro-planing occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas. Checkthe depth of any water before driving throughit. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-erwise, watermay enter the vehicle interior orthe engine compartment. This can damagethe electronic components in the engine orthe automatic transmission. Water can alsobe drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzlesand this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.

If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering andbraking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con-trol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning device andis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freezingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle couldskid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Alwaysadapt your driving style and drive at a speed tosuit the prevailing weather conditions.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 294).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 294).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 294).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent DriveMercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-vative driver assistance and safety systemswhich enhance comfort and support the driver incritical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi-nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-stone on the path towards autonomous driving.Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces allelements of active and passive safety in onewell

Driving systems 147

Drivingandparking

Z

thought out system – for the safety of the vehi-cle occupants and that of other road users.Further information on driving safety systems(Y page 64).

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant road speedfor you. It brakes automatically in order to avoidexceeding the set speed. On long and steepdownhill gradients, especially if the vehicle isladen, you must shift to a lower gear in time. Bydoing so, you will make use of the braking effectof the engine. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes from overheat-ing and wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steadyspeed for a prolonged period. You can store anyroad speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-trol can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor override the laws of physics. Cruise controlcannot take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. Cruise control is only anaid. You are responsible for maintaining a safedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inlane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

i The speed indicated in the speedometermay differ slightly from the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed; Activates or reduces speed= Deactivates cruise control? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speedWhen you activate cruise control, the multifunc-tion display shows the stored speed for five sec-onds. Theé symbol also appears in the mul-tifunction display.Speedometer with segments: when cruisecontrol is activated, the segments from thestored speed to the end of the scale light up.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe parking brake must be released.Ryou are driving faster than 20mph (30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can accept the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-matically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains the

148 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-matically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previously storedspeed.

Setting a speedX Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For example, ifyou accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished overtak-ing.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards=.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou depress the parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position N whiledriving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐trol Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-matically helps you maintain the distance fromthe vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detec-ted with the aid of the radar sensor system.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so thatthe set speed is not exceeded.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is especiallyimportant if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, youwill make use of the braking effect of the engine.This relieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating and wear-ing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk ofa collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent acollision without your intervention. An intermit-tent warning tone will then sound and the dis-tance warning lamp will light up in the instru-ment cluster. Brake immediately in order toincrease the distance to the vehicle in front ortake evasive action provided it is safe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the speed rangebetween 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph(200 km/h).

Driving systems 149

Drivingandparking

Z

Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of the respon-sible authorities. You can refer to the relevantchapter in the Operator's Manual if questionsare asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-ing, or altering of the device will void any war-ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-ically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk ofan accident if you fail to adapt your driving stylenor override the laws of physics. DISTRONICPLUS cannot take account of road, weather andtraffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.

150 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions that do not allowyou to maintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating can cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-cles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehiclein front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedlyaccelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane oran exit laneRbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun-tries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the right (right-hand drivecountries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate and store the current speed or ahigher speed

; To activate and store the current speed or alower speed

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To activate and store the current speed or

call up the last stored speedA To set a specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsTo activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following con-ditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up totwo minutes of driving before DISTRONICPLUS is ready for use.Rthe parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmustbe closed.Rthe hood must be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Driving systems 151

Drivingandparking

Z

ActivatingX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=, or move it up: or down?.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

X Move the cruise control lever repeatedlyup: or down? until the desired speed isset.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, youcan only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once yourvehicle is stationary as well.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, theDISTRONIC PLUS Suspendedmes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Theset distance to a slower-moving vehicle infront will then not be maintained. You will bedriving at the speed you determine by theposition of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is18 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=, up: or down?.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time itis activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-erwise, it sets the vehicle speed to the previ-ously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and drivingX If you want to pull away with DISTRONICPLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.

orX Accelerate briefly.The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed tothat of the vehicle in front.If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicleaccelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facingan unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle thenbrakes automatically.If DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle infront, the system operates like a cruise control.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. Inthis way, the specified minimum distance youhave selected is maintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed tothe set speed.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving stylewhen you have selected the S or M (AMG vehi-cles: S, S+ orM) driving program (Y page 133).Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to theset speed is then noticeably more dynamic. Ifyou have selected the E (AMG vehicles: C) driv-ing program, the vehicle accelerates more gen-tly. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesDISTRONIC PLUS aids you when switching tothe overtaking lane, if:Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distanceto a vehicle in frontRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger ofa collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted ifchanging lanes takes too long or if the distance

152 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

between your vehicle and the vehicle in frontbecomes too small.

i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehi-cles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehi-cles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 155).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has stopped, it will cause your vehicle tobrake and come to a halt.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-tionary and you do not need to depress thebrake.Depending on the specified minimum distance,your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-cient distance behind the vehicle in front. Thespecified minimum distance is set using thecontrol on the cruise control lever.When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seatbelt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

Setting a speedX Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly movethe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly movethe cruise control lever up: or down;beyond the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished overtak-ing.

Setting a specified minimum distanceYou can set the specified minimum distance forDISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,dependent on vehicle speed. You can see thisdistance in the multifunction display(Y page 154).

i Make sure that you maintain a sufficientdistance to the vehicle in front and complywith the minimum distance as required bylaw. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in frontif necessary.

Driving systems 153

Drivingandparking

Z

X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direction:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-ometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or twosegments; in the set speed range light up.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed= light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed inthe speedometer may differ slightly from thespeed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multi-function display

Displaying the assistance graphicX Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer (Y page 195).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicle

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears

when the cruise control lever is actuated)You will see the stored speed for about five sec-onds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

154 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly push the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryIf you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, theDISTRONIC PLUS Off message appears in themultifunction display for approximately five sec-onds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivatedif:Ryou engage the parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towards youin order to pull away and the front-passengerdoor or one of the rear doors is openRthe vehicle is skiddingRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will heara tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS Off messageappears in the multifunction display for approx-imately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: theability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicleswhen cornering is limited. Your vehicle maybrake unexpectedly or late.RDriving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUSmay not detect vehicles which are not drivingin the middle of their lane. The distance to thevehicle in front will be too short.ROther vehicles changing lane: DISTRONICPLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting inyet. The distance to this vehicle will be tooshort.RNarrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does notdetect the vehicle in front on the edge of theroad because of its narrow width. The dis-tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.RObstacles and stationary vehicles:DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and reveals anobstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.RCrossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUSmaymis-takenly detect vehicles that are crossing yourlane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at trafficlights with crossing traffic, for example, couldcause your vehicle to pull away unintention-ally.

In such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

Driving systems 155

Drivingandparking

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle inthe center of the driving lane by means of mod-erate steering interventions in a speed rangefrom 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).It monitors the area in front of your vehicle bymeans of multifunction camera:, at the top ofthe windshield.At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&GoPilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking intoaccount lanemarkings, e.g. when following vehi-cles in a traffic jam.At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)Steering Assist focuses on detected lane mark-ings (left and right), and only on the vehicle infront if lane markings are missing.If these conditions are not present, SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assis-tance.DISTRONIC PLUSmust be active in order for thefunction to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilotcan neither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. It cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in your lane.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot does not detect road and trafficconditions and does not detect all road users. Ifyou are following a vehicle which is drivingtowards the edge of the road, your vehicle couldcome into contact with the curb or other roadboundaries. Be particularly aware of other roadusers, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to yourvehicle.Obstacles such as building site huts on the laneor projecting out into the lane are not detected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. afterintentionally driving over a lane marking, can becorrected at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep yourvehicle in lane. In some cases, the steeringintervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicleback to the lane. In such cases, you must steer

the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does notleave the lane.The support provided by the system can beimpaired if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. ifthe road surface is wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRno, or several, unclear lanemarkings are pres-ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction areaRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadThe system is switched to passive and no longerassists you by performing steering interventionsif:Ryou actively change lanesRyou switch on the turn signalRtake your hands off the steering wheel or donot steer for a prolonged period of time

i After you have finished changing lanes,Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are auto-matically active again.

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not pro-vide assistance:Ron very sharp cornersRwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tirehas been detected and displayed

Pay attention also to the important safety notesfor DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 150).The steering interventions are carried out with alimited steering moment. The system requiresthe driver to keep his hands on the steeringwheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if you take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the systemwill first alert youwitha visual warning. A steering wheel symbolappears in the multifunction display. If you have

156 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

still not started to steer and have not taken holdof the steering wheel after five seconds at thelatest, a warning tone also sounds to remind youto take control of the vehicle. Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive.DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilotX Activate the DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot function using theon-board computer (Y page 196).The DTR+: Steering Assistant On mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are active.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa-ted but not ready for a steering intervention,steering wheel symbol: appears in gray. If thesystem provides you with support by means ofsteering interventions, symbol: is shown ingreen.

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilotX Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steer-ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function usingthe on-board computer (Y page 196).The DTR+: Steering Assistant Off mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deac-tivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or notavailable, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aredeactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-ically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Driving systems 157

Drivingandparking

Z

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunctionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt isfastenedRthe parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions aremet.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal further untilë: appears in the multifunction display.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

If depressing the brake pedal the first time doesnot activate the HOLD function, wait briefly andthen try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automaticallyif:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-tain amount of pressure untilë disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seatbelt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.Rthe hood is opened.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

RACE START

Important safety notesObserve the safety notes for the SPORT han-dling mode (Y page 71).RACESTART is only available forMercedes-AMGvehicles.RACE START is intended solely for activation ondedicated race circuits.RACE START enables optimal acceleration froma standing start. The precondition for this is asuitable high-grip road surface.

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe engine is running and it has reached anoperating temperature of approximately176 ‡ (80 †). This is the case when the oiltemperature gauge in the multifunction dis-play is shown in white.RSPORT handling mode is switched on.(Y page 71)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition.Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal isdepressed (left foot).Rthe transmission is in position D.

158 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Turn the drive program selector clockwise(Y page 134) until the RS lamp lights up.The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UPCancel: Paddle DOWN message appears inthe multifunction display.i If the activation conditions are no longer ful-filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACESTART Canceled message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 135).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheel pad-dle shifter (Y page 135).The RACE START available Depressaccelerator message appears in the multi-function display.i If you do not depress the accelerator pedalfully within two seconds, RACE START is can-celed. The RACE START Not Possible SeeOperator's Manualmessage appears in themultifunction display.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed rises to approximately3,500 rpm.The RACE START Release brake to startmessage appears in themultifunction display.i If you do not release the brake pedal withinfive seconds, RACE START is canceled. TheRACE START Canceled message appears inthe multifunction display.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-ation.The RACE START activemessage appears inthe multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can-ada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ is activated.SPORT handling mode remains switched on.RACE START is deactivated immediately if yourelease the accelerator pedal during RACESTART or if any of the activation conditions areno longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐sible See Operator's Manual messageappears in the multifunction display.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly within ashort period of time, it is only available againafter the vehicle has been driven a certaindistance.

AIRMATIC

Vehicle level

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

Your vehicle regulates its height automatically.All-round level control ensures the best possiblesuspension and constant ground clearance,even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast,the vehicle is lowered automatically to improvedriving safety and to reduce fuel consumption.The following vehicle levels are possible:RNormalRRaised: the vehicle is raised by approximately0.80 in (20mm) when compared with the nor-mal levelRLowered: the vehicle is raised by approx-imately 0.40 in (10 mm) when compared withthe normal level

i These changes in level are so slight that youare hardly aware of them.

The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can beset manually.The "Lowered” vehicle level is set automatically:Rat speeds above 70 mph (113 km/h)Rif you have selected "Sports tuning"(Y page 160)

Setting the vehicle levelSelect the "Normal" setting for normal road sur-faces and "Raised" for driving with snow chainsor on particularly poor road surfaces. Your

Driving systems 159

Drivingandparking

Z

selection remains stored even if you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

Setting raised level

X Start the engine.If indicator lamp; is not lit:X Press the: button.Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle heightis adjusted to raised level.The Vehicle Risingmessage appears in thedisplay.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:Rdrive at a speed over approximately 75 mph(120 km/h)Rdrive for approximately three minutes at aspeed over 50 mph (80 km/h)

The "Raised level" remains active when you arenot driving within these speed ranges.

Setting the normal levelX Start the engine.If indicator lamp; is lit:X Press button: .Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle isadjusted to normal level.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.

The damping is tuned individually to each wheeland depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-fort

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuning

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport modeensures even better contact with the road.Select this mode when employing a sporty driv-ing style, e.g. on winding country roads.X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. Sports suspen-sion tuning is selected.The AIRMATIC SPORTmessage appears in themultifunction display.

Comfort tuning

In comfort mode, the driving characteristics ofyour vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore,select this mode if you favor amore comfortabledriving style. Select comfort mode also whendriving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straightstretches of highway.

160 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Press button:.Indicator lamp= lights up. Comfort tuning isselected.The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears inthe multifunction display.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-tem

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGVehicles with level control:The vehicle is slightly lowered if:Ryou have selected comfort suspension tun-ing andRyou lock the vehicle within approximately60 seconds of switching off the engine

You and people in the vicinity of the wheelarch or the underbodymay thus become trap-ped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of thewheel arch or the underbody when you lockthe vehicle.

! The vehicle is lowered by about 0.8 in(20 mm) if:Ryou have selected "Comfortable tuning"Ryou switch off the engine and thenRyou lock the vehicle within approximately60 seconds

When parking, position your vehicle so that itdoes not make contact with the curb as thevehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could other-wise be damaged.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.The damping is tuned individually to each wheeland depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection of Sport, Sport + orComfort

Sport mode

: Mode selection button; Button to store, recall and display the selec-

ted mode= Sport + mode indicator lamp? Sport mode indicator lampThe firmer suspension setting in Sport modeensures better contact with the road. Select thismode when employing a sporty driving style,e.g. on winding country roads.X Press button:.Indicator lamp? lights up. You have selectedSport mode.The AMG Ride Control SPORT messageappears in the multifunction display.

Sport + modeThe very firm setting of the suspension setting inSport + mode ensures the best possible contactwith the road. Select this mode preferably whendriving on race circuits.If indicator lamps= and? are off:X Press button: twice.Indicator lamps= and? light up. You haveselected Sport + mode.

Driving systems 161

Drivingandparking

Z

The AMG Ride Control SPORT + messageappears in the multifunction display.

If indicator lamp? lights up:X Press button: once.Second indicator lamp= lights up. You haveselected Sport + mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Comfort modeWhen comfort mode is selected, the drivingcharacteristics of your vehicle are more com-fortable. Select this mode if you favor a comfort-oriented driving style. Select comfort mode alsowhen driving fast on straight roads, e.g. onstraight stretches of highway.X Press button: repeatedly until indicatorlamps= and? go out.You have selected Comfort mode.The AMG Suspension System COMFORTmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Storing and calling up settingsOnce the suspension setting and drive programhave been selected, you can store and call upyour settings using AMG button;.X To store: press and hold AMG button; untilyou hear a tone.

X To call up: press AMG button;.The stored suspension setting and drive pro-gram are selected.

X To display: briefly press AMG button;.Your selection appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Vehicle level

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

The vehicle may be lowered if you press the sus-pension setting selector button or the AMG but-ton. The vehicle also lowers if it is stationary.

! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning hasbeen selected, the vehicle's ground clearancedecreases. Make sure that no objectsbecome trapped or that the vehicle does notbecome damaged, for example, on the curb.

i The vehicle level may change visibly at therear axle if you park the vehicle and the out-side temperature changes. If the temperaturedrops, the vehicle level lowers; with anincrease in temperature, the vehicle levelrises.

Changing the rear axle ride heightThis function is only available on the Mercedes-AMG CLS 63 4MATIC.The vehicle level at the rear axle depends on theselected suspension mode and the vehiclespeed.The vehicle level at the rear axle changes whiledriving depending on which suspension mode isselected:RComfort: +0.4 in (+10 mm)RSport + and Sport: -0.6 in (-15 mm)When changing from Comfort to Sport or Sport+, the rear axle is lowered by approximately1.0 in (25 mm). When changing from Sport orSport + to Comfort, the rear axle is raised byapproximately 1.0 in (25 mm). This level changealso takes place when the vehicle is stationary.If you drive faster than 105mph (170 km/h), therear axle level is set to a middle level. Thisincreases driving safety and reduces air resist-ance. If you then drive slower than 93 mph(150 km/h), the level of the rear axle is againadjusted to correspond to the selected suspen-sion mode.

Load compensationThe vehicle can compensate differences in thevehicle level by raising or lowering the rear axle.This is the case, for example, if people get out orif luggage is being loaded.Load compensation takes place if:Ra door or the trunk lid is openedRthe parked vehicle is unlockedFor larger level changes, the engine must berunning.

162 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC canneither reduce the risk of accident nor overridethe laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.This may damage the transfer case. Damageof this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels mustremain either on the ground or be fully raised.Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-cle with all wheels in full contact with theground.

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if youuse winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chainsif necessary.

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma-nently driven. Together with ESP®, it improvesthe traction of your vehicle whenever a drivewheel spins due to insufficient grip.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area aroundyour vehicle using six sensors in the frontbumper and six sensors in the rear bumper.PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly thedistance between your vehicle and an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediate sur-roundings. You are always responsible for safemaneuvering, parking and exiting a parkingspace. When maneuvering, parking or pullingout of a parking space, make sure that there areno persons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, such as

flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONICdoes not detect such objects when they are inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic carwash, the compressed-air brakes on a truckor a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONICto malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side(example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.They can otherwise not function correctly. Cleanthe sensors regularly, taking care not to scratchor damage them (Y page 274).

Driving systems 163

Drivingandparking

Z

Range

: Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners); Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners)= Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center)? Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center)Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-evant warning displays light up and a warningtone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-

cle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is located onthe dashboard above the center air vents. Thewarning display for the rear area is located onthe headliner in the rear compartment.The warning display for each side of the vehicleis divided into five yellow and two red segments.PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segmentsshowing operational readiness= light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-mine which warning display is active when theengine is running.

Transmission posi-tion

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle isrolling backwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-mittent warning tone for approximately twoseconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two seconds.

164 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

This indicates that you have now reached theminimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp; lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock.

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit. Youalso hear a warning tonefor approximately twoseconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and the indi-cator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 274).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-sound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parking aidwith ultrasound. It measures the road on bothsides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicatesa suitable parking space. Active steering inter-vention and brake application can assist you

during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC(Y page 163).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsible

Driving systems 165

Drivingandparking

Z

for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting aparking space. Make sure that no persons, ani-mals or objects are in the maneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park-ing Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharpangle. Otherwise, you may damage thewheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable for park-ing, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfacesParking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parkingspace as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or overgrownmight be identified or measured incorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupied bytrailer drawbars might not be identified assuch or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 164) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active Parking Assistwill then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not use ActiveParking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tires are inflated to thespecified tire pressure. This has a direct influ-

ence on the parking characteristics of thevehicle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRon the same level as the road, e.g. not on thepavementRon straight roads, not bends

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range of ActiveParking Assist will not be detected when theparking space is measured. These are not takeninto account when the parking procedure is cal-culated, e.g. overhanging loads, truck over-hangs or loading ramps.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and deactivate Active ParkingAssist.

For further information on the detection range(Y page 163).Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces at right angles to the direction oftravel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directly nextto one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces that are parallel or at right anglesto the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space as beingblocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-ing blocks

166 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-ver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

Example: detected parking space: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is switched on automati-cally when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys-tem independently locates and measures park-ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-cleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider thanyour vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the size of a parking space if it is atright angles to the direction of travel. You willneed to judge whether your vehicle will fit intothe parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as astatus indicator in the instrument cluster. Whena parking space has been detected, an arrowtowards the right or the left also appears. Bydefault, Active Parking Assist only displays park-ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parkingspaces on the driver's side are displayed assoon as the turn signal on the driver's side isactivated. When parking on the driver's side,this must remain switched on until you acknowl-edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press-

ing thea button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel. The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you are driv-ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft(15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the vehicle when it is only beingbraked by Active Parking Assist it could rollaway if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always secure itagainst rolling away.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You are respon-sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-bol shows the desired parking space in theinstrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure:press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist: pressthea button on themultifunction steeringwheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Driving systems 167

Drivingandparking

Z

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at alltimes. When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill when the vehicle approaches therear border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight parkingspaces.

The Park Assist Active Select DObserve Surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D while thevehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill when the vehicle approaches therear border of the parking space.

The Park Assist Active Select RObserve Surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.Further transmission shifts may be necessary.As soon as the parking procedure is complete,the Park Assist Finished message appearsin the multifunction display and you will hear atone. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle iskept stationary without the driver having todepress the brake pedal. The braking effect iscanceled when you depress the acceleratorpedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brake applica-tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished,you must steer and brake again yourself.PARKTRONIC is still available.X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messages dis-played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 164).

Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-ing space after parking is dependent on vari-

ous factors. These include the position andshape of the vehicles parked in front andbehind it and the conditions of the location. Itmay be the case that Active Parking Assistguides you too far into a parking space, or notfar enough into it. In some cases, it may alsolead you across or onto the curb. If necessary,you should cancel the parking procedure withActive Parking Assist.RYou can also select preselect transmissionpositionD. The vehicle redirects and does notdrive as far into the parking space. Should thetransmission change take place too early, theparking procedure will be canceled. A sensi-ble parking position can no longer be ach-ieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can supportyou when exiting the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must be highenough at the front and the rear. A curb is toosmall, for example.Rthe border of the parking space must not betoo wide. Your vehicle can be maneuveredinto a position at a maximum of 45° to thestarting position in the parking space.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParking Assist brakes automatically whilst thevehicle exits the parking space. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.X Start the engine.X Release the parking brake.X Switch on the turn signal in the direction youare pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure:press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

or

168 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X To exit a parking space using Active Park-ing Assist: press thea button on themul-tifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Donot exceed a maximum speed of approx-imately 6mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assistwill be canceled.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired or according to the message whenthe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistActive Accelerate and Brake ObserveSurroundings message appears in the mul-tifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone and thePark Assist Finished message appears inthe multifunction display. You will then have tosteer and merge into traffic on your own.PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take overthe steering before the vehicle has exited theparking space completely. This is useful if yourecognize that it is already possible to pull out ofthe parking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistYou can cancel Active Parking Assist at anytime.X Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once.The Park Assist Canceled message

appears in the multifunction display and awarning tone sounds.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button in the centerconsole (Y page 165).PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park-ing Assist is immediately canceled. The ParkAssist Canceled message appears in themultifunction display and a warning tonesounds.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automaticallyif:Rthe transmission is shifted too earlyRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-ger possibleRyou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. Insuch cases the÷warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-appears and themultifunction display shows thePark Assist Canceled message.When Active Parking Assist is canceled, youmust steer and brake again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behind thevehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-tem.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

Driving systems 169

Drivingandparking

Z

i The text shown in the multimedia systemdepends on the language setting. The follow-ing are examples of rear view camera displaysin the multimedia system.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safemaneuvering and parking.Whenmaneu-vering or parking, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area in whichyou are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will function ina limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-terRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 274)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rearview camera may be restricted due to additionalaccessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.license plate holder, bicycle rack).On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,leaving the standard height can result in inac-curacies in the guide lines, depending on tech-nical conditions.

i The rear view camera is protected from rain-drops and dust by means of a flap. When therear view camera is activated, this flap opens.The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished themaneuvering processRyou switch off the engineRyou open the trunkObserve the notes on cleaning (Y page 274).For technical reasons, the flap may remainopen briefly after the rear view camera hasbeen deactivated.

Switching the rear view camera on/offX To switch on: make sure that the Activa‐tion by R gear function is selected in themultimedia system (see Digital Operator'sManual).

X Engage reverse gear.The rear view camera flap opens. The multi-media systemshows the area behind the vehi-cle with guide lines.The image from the rear view camera is avail-able throughout the maneuvering process.

X To switch off:shift the transmission to posi-tion P.

orX Drive forwards a short distance.

Displays in the multimedia systemThe rear view cameramay show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.The rear view camera does not show objects inthe following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

170 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleWhen the transmission is shifted to position R,guidelines appear in the camera image.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

E Front warning displayF Rear warning displayG Additional vehicle icon: PARKTRONIC meas-

urement operational readiness indicatorWhen PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 164),the vehicle icon appears in multimedia systemdisplayG. If the PARKTRONIC warning displaysare active or light up, warning displaysE andF are also active or light up correspondingly inthe multimedia system display.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

Driving systems 171

Drivingandparking

Z

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 170).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, carefullyback up until you reach the end position.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost parallelin the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 170).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the parkingspace until yellow guide line; reaches park-ing space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position andback up carefully.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.The white lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possible.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center positionwhile the vehicle is stationary.

172 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reached thefinal position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel in theparking space.

Wide-angle function

: Symbol for the wide-angle view function; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the rear view camera to selecta wide-angle view.When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 164),a symbol for your own vehicle appears in thedisplay of the multimedia system. If thePARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn-ing displays= light up in themultimedia systemin yellow or red accordingly.

360° camera

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting of fourcameras.The system processes images from the follow-ing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrorsThe cameras cover the immediate surroundingsof the vehicle. The system supports you, e.g.when parking or if vision is restricted at an exit.You can show images from the 360° camera infull-screen mode or in six different split-screenviews on the multimedia system. A split-screenview also includes a top view of the vehicle. Thisview is calculated from the data supplied by theinstalled cameras (virtual camera).The six split-screen views are:RTop view and picture from the rear view cam-era (130° viewing angle)RTop view and image from the front camera(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering wheel angle)RTop view and enlarged rear viewRTop view and enlarged front viewRTop view and images from the rear-facing sidecameras (rear wheel view)RTop view and images from the forward-facingside cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from D or R to N, the dynamicguide lines are not shown in the multimedia sys-tem.When you change between transmission posi-tions D and R, you see the previously selectedfront or rear view.Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will alsobe optically displayed:Rin split screen view as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon in the top view, orRat the bottom right as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle symbol in full-screenmode

The line thickness and color of the bracketsshow how far the vehicle is from an object.

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONICis activeRyellow brackets with normal lines: an object ispresent in close range of the vehicleRred line: an object is present in the immediateclose range of the vehicle

Important safety notesThe 360°camera is only an aid and may show adistorted view of obstacles, show them incor-rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not asubstitute for attentive driving.You are always responsible for safe maneuver-ing and parking. When maneuvering or parking,make sure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you are maneuver-ing.You are always responsible for safety, and mustalways pay attention to your surroundings whenparking and maneuvering. This applies to theareas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-ers.The 360° camera will not function or will func-tion in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-terRif the camera lenses are dirty or coveredRif the vehicle components in which the cam-eras are installed are damaged. In this event,have the camera position and setting checkedat a qualified specialist workshop

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damage toobjects or the vehicle.Guide lines are always shown at road level.The field of vision and other functions of thecamera system may be restricted due to addi-tional attachments (e.g. license plate holder,rear bicycle carrier).

On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,depending on technical conditions, leaving thestandard height can result in:Rinaccuracies in the guide linesRinaccuracies in the display of generatedimages (top view)

Activation conditionsThe image from the 360° camera appears if:Rthe multimedia system is switched onRthe 360° Camera function is switched onSwitching on the 360° cameraX Press theØ button in the center consolefor longer than two seconds.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and the imagefrom the front camera orRa split screen with top view and the imagefrom the rear view camera

orX Briefly press theØ button in the centerconsole.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Select 360° Camera and press7 to confirm.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and the imagefrom the front camera orRa split screen with top view and the imagefrom the rear view camera

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can be automaticallydisplayed by engaging reverse gear.X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in the multimedia system(see Digital Operator's Manual).

X To show the 360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The multimedia system shows the areabehind the vehicle in split-screen mode. Yousee the top view of the vehicle and the imagefrom the rear view camera.

174 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Selecting the split-screen view or fullscreen modeSwitching between split screen views:X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:slide5 the controller.

X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn3the controller.

Switching to full screen mode:X To switch to 180° View: turn3 the con-troller to select and press7 to confirm.

i The full screen option is only available in thefollowing views:RTop view with picture from the rear viewcameraRTop viewwith picture from the front camera

Displays in the multimedia system

Important safety notesThe camera system may show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.Obstacles are not shown by the system in thefollowing locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin close range above the handle on the trunklidRvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between the variouscameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

; Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image

= Guide line for the maximum steering angle? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steering

wheel angle (dynamic)A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1m) from the rear of the vehicleD BumperE Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.3 m) from the rear of the vehicleWhen the transmission is shifted to position R,guidelines appear in the camera image.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

Top view with picture from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4 m) from the front of thevehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

A Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.3 m) from the front of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1 m) from the front of the vehi-cle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image enlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.3 m) from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the distanceto the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Top view with image from the side cam-eras

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facingside camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

i You can also select the side camera settingfor the rear-facing view.

180° view

: Symbol for the full screen setting with rearview camera image

; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displays

i 180° view can also be selected as frontview.

Select this view when you are driving out of anexit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,for example.

176 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Exiting 360° camera display modeThe 360° camera display is stopped:Rwhen you select transmission position P, orRwhen you are driving at moderate speedsThe previous display appears in the multimediasystem display. You can also switch the displayby selecting the& symbol in the display andpressing7 the controller to confirm.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It isactive in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSISTdetects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-ing lapses in concentration on the part of thedriver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It might notalways recognize fatigue or increasing inatten-tiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all.The system is not a substitute for a well-restedand attentive driver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed or notoccur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-imately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surfaceis uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-erationRif you are predominantly driving at a speedbelow 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph(200 km/h)Rif you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUSSteering Assist activatedRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when youchange lanes or change your speed

The attention level evaluation is deleted andrestarts when the journey is continued, if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open the driv-er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or totake a break

Displaying the attention level

In the assistance menu (Y page 195) of the on-board computer you can call up the current sta-tus information.X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTIONASSIST using the on-board computer(Y page 195).

The following information appears:Rlength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTIONASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levelsfrom high to low.Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot output a warn-ing, the System Suspended messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 196).The system determines the attention level ofthe driver depending on the setting selected:

Standard selected: the sensitivity with whichthe system determines the attention level is setto normal.Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected by AttentionAssist is adapted accordingly and the driver iswarned earlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunction dis-play in the assistance graphic display.

Driving systems 177

Drivingandparking

Z

WhenATTENTIONASSIST has been deactivated,it is automatically reactivated after the enginehas been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-responds to the last selection activated (stand-ard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentrationare detected, a warning appears in the multi-function display: Attention Assist: Take aBreak!In addition to the display message shown in themultifunction display, you will then hear a warn-ing tone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the display message with theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest. If you do not takea break, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happenif ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indi-cators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concen-tration.Vehicles with COMAND multifunction dis-play: if a warning is output in the multifunctiondisplay, a service station search is performed inthe multimedia system. You can select a servicestation and navigation to this service station willthen begin. This function can be activated anddeactivated in the multimedia system.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notesTraffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speedpermitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.The data and general traffic regulations stored inthe navigation system are used to determine thecurrent speed limit.Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, andfor this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily(e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. There isalso no display for changing traffic signs.If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle ispassed, the display of the speed limits is upda-ted.Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by anadditional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are alsoshown.

The sign indicating the end of a restriction onlyappears with the restriction in the instrumentcluster when:Rthe regulation must be observed with therestriction, orRTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determinewhether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine amaximumpermitted speed fromany of the avail-able sources, no speed limit appears in theinstrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-tries. In this case, display: appears in theassistance graphic (Y page 195).

Important safety notesTraffic SignAssist is only an aid and is not alwaysable to correctly display speed limits. Trafficsigns always have priority over the Traffic SignAssist display.The system may be either functionally impairedor temporarily unavailable if the information inthe digital streetmap of the navigation system isincorrect or out of date.

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphicX Call up the assistance graphics display func-tion using the on-board computer(Y page 195).Detected traffic signs are displayed in theinstrument cluster.

178 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for

which the restriction in the additional sign isrelevant

= Additional sign for unknown restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 100 mph(100 km/h) and a speed limit of 80 km/h(80 mph) apply with an unknown restriction.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 179) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 181).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist monitors the areas on eitherside of the vehicle that are not visible to thedriver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-sors. A warning lamp lights up in the exteriormirrors and draws your attention to vehiclesdetected in the monitored area. If you thenswitch on the corresponding turn signal tochange lane, you will also receive an optical andaudible warning.Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the sides of the rear bumper.Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice orslush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensorsmust not be covered, for example by cycle racksor overhanging loads. Following a severe impactor in the event of damage to the bumpers, havethe function of the sensors checked at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist mayotherwise not work properly.

Monitoring areaIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain, snow or sprayRthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles orbicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m);from the vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors thearea up to 10 ft (3 m) next to= and behind:your vehicle, as shown in the picture.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles driving at the inneredge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, such astrucks.

Indicator and warning lamp

: Indicator lamp (yellow)Warning lamp (red)

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yellowat speeds of up to 20mph (30 km/h). At speedsabove 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lampgoes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning is alwaysemitted when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, the warning onlyoccurs if the difference in speed is less than7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assistis no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warning lampsis adjusted automatically according to thebrightness of the surroundings.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring range ofBlind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-sponding turn signal, a double warning tonesounds. The redwarning lamp flashes. If the turnsignal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-ted by the flashing of the red warning lamp.There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activatedin the on-board computer (Y page 196).

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn yellow.

180 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

LaneKeepingAssistmonitors the area in front ofyour vehicle with camera:, which is mountedat the top of thewindshield. Active LaneKeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally.This function is available in the range between40mph and 120mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).A warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the riskof an accident if you fail to adapt your drivingstyle nor override the laws of physics. LaneKeeping Assist cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsiblefor maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in good timeand for staying in lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-cle in the lane.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflections (e.g. when the road surfaceis wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive (Y page 197).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 195) are shown in green. Lane Keep-ing Assist is ready for use.

StandardIf Standard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveWhen Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Active Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance package consistsof DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149), Active BlindSpot Assist (Y page 182) and Active Lane Keep-ing Assist (Y page 184).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle,to monitor the area to the sides of the vehiclewhich the driver is unable to see. Awarning lamplights up in the exterior mirrors and draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the monitored

area. If you then switch on the correspondingturn signal to change lane, you will also receivean optical and audible warning. If a risk of lateralcollision is detected, corrective braking mayhelp you avoid a collision. Before a course-cor-recting brake application, Active Blind SpotAssist evaluates the space in the direction oftravel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this,Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facingradar sensors.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is nota substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.

182 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpers andbehind a cover in the radiator trim. Make surethat the bumpers and the cover in the radiatorgrill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensorsmust not be covered, for example by cycle racksor overhanging cargo. Following a severe impactor in the event of damage to the bumpers, havethe function of the radar sensors checked at aqualified specialist workshop. Active Blind SpotAssist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m);from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist mon-itors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to= andbehind: your vehicle, as shown in the picture.

The detection of obstacles can be impaired inthe case of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or sprayVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated or indicated with a delay.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrowvehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, ormay only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles at the edge of theirlane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, such astrucks.

Warning lamp

: Warning lampActive Blind Spot Assist is not active at speedsbelow approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehi-cles in the monitoring range are then not indi-cated.When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indi-cator lamp: in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicatorlamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning is always

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

given when a vehicle enters the blind spot mon-itoring range frombehind or from the side.Whenyou overtake a vehicle, the warning only occursif the difference in speed is less than 7 mph(12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is notoperational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-roundings.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to change lanesand a vehicle is detected in the side monitoringrange, you receive a visual and acoustic collisionwarning. You then hear a double warning toneand red warning lamp: flashes. If the turn sig-nal remains on, detected vehicles are indicatedby the flashing of redwarning lamp:. There areno further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. Thisis meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs,red warning lamp: flashes in the exterior mir-ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition,display; appears in the multifunction displayunderlining the danger of a side collision.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. An inappropri-

ate course-correcting brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction or accelerate, for example.The course-correcting brake application is avail-able in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Either no braking application, or a course-cor-recting brake application adapted to the drivingsituation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist(Y page 196) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn yellow.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of multifunctioncamera: at the top of the windshield. Variousdifferent areas to the front, rear and side of your

184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

vehicle are also monitored with the aid of theradar sensor system. Active Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, alane-correcting application of the brakes canbring the vehicle back into the original lane.This function is available in the range between40mph and 120mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system must beoperational

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, Active LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics. ActiveLane Keeping Assist cannot take account ofroad and weather conditions. It may not recog-nize traffic situations. Active Lane KeepingAssist is only an aid. You are responsible for thedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuouslykeep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflections (e.g. when the road surfaceis wet)

Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpersor the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured bysnowRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadIf no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane andbroken lanemarkings are detected, no lane-cor-recting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.

Lane-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist only detects traf-fic conditions or road users to a limitedextent. In very rare cases, the system maymake an inappropriate brake application, e.g.after intentionally driving over a solid lanemarking. There is a risk of an accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure that

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

there is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.This ismeant to assist you in bringing the vehicleback to the original lane.If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction display.A lane-correcting brake application can bemadeafter driving over a lane marking recognize asbeing solid or broken. Before this, a warningmust be given bymeans of intermittent vibrationin the steering wheel. In addition, a lane withlane markings on both sides must be recog-nized.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detectedin the adjacent lane. The following vehicles canhave an influence on brake application: oncom-ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi-cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.

i A further lane-correcting brake applicationcan only occur after your vehicle has returnedto the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-erate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-eration.Ryou have switched on the turn signal.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane inwhich you are driving.Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tirehas been detected and displayed.

There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keep-ing Assist could misjudge the given traffic sit-uation. An inappropriate brake application maybe interrupted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.Rswitch on the turn signal.Rclearly brake or accelerate.A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-ted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive (Y page 197).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 195) are shown in green. Active LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.If Standard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

When Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.

186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

The on-board computer only showsmessages orwarnings from certain systems in the multifunc-tion display. You should therefore make sureyour vehicle is operating safely at all times.If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.Contact a qualified specialist workshop.For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-tration (Y page 34).

Displays and operation

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 148):The segments light up from the stored speedto the end of the scale.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 149):

One or two segments in the set speed rangelight up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in frontmoving more slowly than the stored speed:The segments between the speed of the vehi-cle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as thiscould damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-play indicates the temperature measured anddoes not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in the multi-function display (Y page 190).The multifunction display shows changes in theoutside temperature with a delay.

Coolant temperature gauge

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The enginewill otherwise be damaged.

188 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-ment cluster on the left-hand side (Y page 34).Under normal operating conditions and with thespecified coolant level, the coolant temperaturemay rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock.You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.Vehicles with a COMAND multimedia sys-tem: you can find further information on theVoice Control System in the separate operat-ing instructions.Vehicles with Audio 20 multimedia sys-tem: you can find further information onvoice-operated control for navigation in themanufacturer's operating instructions.

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects theprevious or next station, when thepreset list or station list is active,or an audio track or video sceneRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephone num-ber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects a pre-set list or a station list in thedesired frequency range, or anaudio track or video scene usingrapid scrollingRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms the selection or displaymessageRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumber

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off voice-operated navi-gation or the Voice Control SystemRHides displaymessages or calls upthe last Trip menu function usedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Displays and operation 189

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

? RSwitches on voice-operated navi-gation or the Voice Control System

Multifunction display

: Text field; Menu bar= Drive program? Transmission positionA Permanent display: outside temperature or

speedX To display menu bar;: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.Text field: shows the selectedmenu or sub-menu as well as display messages.If you do not press the buttons any longer,menu bar; is faded out after a few seconds.

Possible displays in the multifunction dis-play:RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shiftingmanually (Y page 135)Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 165)RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 148)R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist(Y page 108)

R¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 126)Rë HOLD function (Y page 157)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the= or; button on the steeringwheel to call up themenu bar and select amenu.Operating the on-board computer (Y page 189).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 190)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 192)RAudio menu (Y page 193)RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 194)RDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 195)RServ. menu (Y page 197)RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 197)RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)(Y page 201)

The display messages dependent on the multi-media system. This is why the displays for theAudio, Navi and Tel menus may differ slightlyto those in your vehicle.

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steer-ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom-eter: and odometer; appears.

190 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Distance; Driving time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom Start or From Reset.The values in the From Start submenu are cal-culated from the start of a journey whilst thevalues in the From Reset submenu are calcu-lated from the last time the submenu was reset(Y page 191).In the following cases, the trip computer is auto-matically reset From Start:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have beenexceeded, the trip computer is automaticallyreset From Reset.ECO displayThe ECO display is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select ECODISPLAY.If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For more information on the ECO display, see(Y page 144).

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press9 or: to select the display withapproximate range and the current fuel con-sumption.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-plays the approximate range.The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amount offuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refu-eledC appears instead of approximaterange.

Digital speedometerX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.A gearshift recommendation Z can alsoappear in the display.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recom-mendation is displayed in the status area ofthe multifunction display.Observe the information on gearshift recom-mendation Z when shifting manually(Y page 135).

Resetting valuesX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press: to select Yes and pressa toconfirm.

Menus and submenus 191

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO display

i If you reset the values in the ECO display,the values in the "From Start" trip computerare also reset. If you reset the values in the"From Start" trip computer, the values in theECO display are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.Observe the additional information on naviga-tion in the Digital Operator's Manual of the mul-timedia system.X Switch on the multimedia system.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to destination; Distance to the next change of direction

= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indicatorshortens towards the top of the display as youapproach the point of the announced change ofdirection.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lanes not recommended? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of directionA Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, new lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of directionif the digital map supports this data. During thechange of direction, new lanes may be added.Lane not recommended=: you will not be ableto complete the next change of direction if youstay in this lane.Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction?: in this lane you will be

192 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

able to complete the next two changes of direc-tion without changing lane.

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

The navigation system displays additional infor-mation and the vehicle status.Possible displays:RNew Route... or Calculating RouteA new route is calculated.RRoad Not MappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigitalmap but the road is not recognized, e.g.newly built streets, car parks or private land.RNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selecteddestination.RO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Active station list; Station frequency with memory positionThe menu shows station; with station fre-quency or station name. The preset position isonly displayed along with station; if this hasbeen stored.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectRadio.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select a preset list or station list: pressand briefly hold the9 or: button untilthe preset list or station list in the desiredfrequency range is shown.

X To select a station: briefly press9or:.i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on radio operation, see"Satellite radio" in the separate operatinginstructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

Audio data from various audio devices or mediacan be played, depending on the equipmentinstalled in the vehicle.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectaudio CD or MP3 mode.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select the next/previous track: brieflypress the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list (rapidscrolling): press and hold the9 or:button until desired track: appears.If you press and hold9 or:, the rapidscrolling speed is increased. Not all audiodrives or data carriers support this function.If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.

Video DVD operation

Menus and submenus 193

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Only for vehicles with a COMAND multimediasystem: you can use the Audio menu to playvideo DVDs.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectvideo DVD.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select the next or previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene:appears.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-facturer’s operating instructions).

X Switch on the multimedia system.X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to themul-timedia system (see Digital Operator's Man-ual).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found a net-work and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searching fora network.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the multi-function display.You can accept a call at any time regardless ofthe menu selected.X Press the6 button on the steering wheelto accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steering wheelto reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone bookX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Authorize access to the phone book on thephone.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To start rapid scrolling: press and hold:or9 for longer than one second.The names in the phone book are displayedquickly one after the other.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored fora name: press the6 ora button tostart dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name:press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the telephone book: press the~or% button.

194 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to the redialmemory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~or% button.

Assistance menu

IntroductionDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theDriveAssist menu:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 195)RDeactivating/activating ESP® (exceptMercedes‑AMG vehicles) (Y page 195)RActivating/deactivating Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot of DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 196)RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake(Y page 196)RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PREVEN-TION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 196)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST(Y page 196)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist orActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 196)RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assistor Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 197)

Displaying the assistance graphic

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select Assist.Graphic.X Pressa to confirm.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.The assistance graphic shows you the statusand further information on the following driv-ing systems or driving safety systems:RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 178)RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 67)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 177)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 181)RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 184)

X Press: to display the ATTENTION ASSISTassessment.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

i Observe the important safety notes on ESP®(Y page 69).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelDeactivating/activating ESP® on Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 71).For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 69).X Start the engine.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select ESP.

Menus and submenus 195

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights up continuouslywhen the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warninglamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not availabledue to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 229).Observe the information on display messages(Y page 204).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select PRE-SAFE Brake.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theassistance graphic shows theæ symbol inthe multifunction display.

For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see(Y page 72).

Activating/deactivating COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUSX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select Col‐lision Prevent..X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, the assistance graphic showstheæ symbol in the multifunction display.

For further information about COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 67).

Activating/deactivating SteeringAssist and Stop&Go PilotX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select DTR+: Steer. Asst.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot areactivated, themultifunction display shows theDTR+: Steer. Asst. On message.

Further information about DISTRONIC PLUSwith Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(Y page 155).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectAttention Assist.X Pressa to confirm your selection.The current selection appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set Off,Standard or Sensitive.X Press thea button to save the setting.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in themultifunction dis-play in the assistance graphics display.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 177).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot Assist.X Press thea button.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

For further information about Blind Spot Assist,see (Y page 179).

196 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

For further information about Active Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 182).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectLane Keep. Assist.X Press thea button.The current selection appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set Off,Standard or Adaptive.X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 181).For further information about Active Lane Keep-ing Assist, see (Y page 184).

Service menuDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theServ. menu:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 203)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-tem (Y page 299)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 299)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 270)

Settings menu

IntroductionDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, In the Sett.menu you have the follow-ing options:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 197)RChanging the light settings (Y page 198)RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 199)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 199)RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 200)

Instrument cluster

Selecting the distance unitThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-tifunction display.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer function.You will see the selected setting: km or miles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for distanceapplies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menuRthe odometer and trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the Navi menuRcruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting permanent displayThe Permanent Display: function allows youto choose whether the multifunction displayalways shows the outside temperature or thespeed.The speed display is inverse to the speedome-ter.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.The current setting, Outside Temperatureor Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer[mph], appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Menus and submenus 197

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Lights

Setting the brightness of the instrumentcluster lighting and switchesThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-plays and the controls in the vehicle interior canbe adjusted with the Brightness Display/Switches: function.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBrightness Display/Switches: function.The current setting appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from Level 1 toLevel 5 (bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.If the light switch is set to theÃ, T orL position, the brightness is dependentupon the brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness of themultifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDay. Run. Lights function.If the Day. Run. Lights function has beenswitched on, the multifunction display showsthe cone of light and theW symbol inorange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime running lamps(Y page 105).

Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmbient Brightness function.The current setting appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from Off to Level 5(bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Setting the ambient lighting colorX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmb. Light Col. function.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set the colorto SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR.

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Activating/deactivating surround light-ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the SurroundLighting function.If the Surround Lighting function is activa-ted, the light cone and the area around thevehicle are displayed in orange in the multi-function display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

198 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exteriorlighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKeyto position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start the engine.If you have activated the Surround Lightingfunction and the light switch is set to theÃposition, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine, thesurround lighting is switched off and auto-matic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 105).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine is switched off. If you close allthe doors and the trunk lid/tailgate, the exte-rior lighting goes off after 15 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, the follow-ing light up:RParking lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you activate the Light. Delay function, theinterior lighting remains on for 20 seconds afteryou remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theLight. Delay function.When the Light. Delay function is activa-ted, the vehicle interior is displayed in orangein the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Door Locks function.If the Auto. Door Locks function is switchedon, the multifunction display shows the vehi-cle's doors in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.If you activate the Auto. Door Locks function,the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed ofaround 9 mph (15 km/h).For further information on the automatic lockingfeature, see (Y page 82).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, anacoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi-cle.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunction displaylights up orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one has

Menus and submenus 199

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

any body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the Easy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated,the vehicle steering wheel is displayed inorange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 100).

Switching the seat belt adjustment on/offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBelt Adjustment function.When the Belt Adjustment function is acti-vated, the seat belt is displayed in orange inthe multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on belt adjustment, see(Y page 45).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offThis function is only availablewhen the vehicle isequipped with the electrical fold-in function.When you switch on the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ing function, the exterior mirrors are folded inwhen the vehicle is locked. If you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold outagain.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Settings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isswitched on, the multifunction display showsthe vehicle's exterior mirror in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorFolding function and you fold in the exteriormirrors by pressing button:, the exterior mir-rors will not fold out automatically (Y page 101).You can then only fold out the exterior mirrorsusing button:.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? functionappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select No orYes.X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you have selected Yes and confirmed, themultifunction display shows a confirmationmessage.

For safety reasons, the Day Lights function inthe Lights submenu is only reset if the vehicleis stationary.

200 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Warm-up

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Status indicator for ECO start/stop function

(Y page 126)X Press= or; on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP=indicates that the engine has reached theoverrevving range when in the manual driveprogram.Engine oil temperature: if the engine is atnormal operating temperature, the multifunc-tion display shows oil temperature? inwhite.If the multifunction display shows oil temper-ature? in blue, the engine is not yet at nor-mal operating temperature. Avoid driving atfull engine output during this time.If the conditions for the ECO start/stop func-tion are fulfilled and the vehicle is stationary,the menu shows status indicatorB.

SETUP

: Drive program (C/SS+ or M); ESP® mode ON, OFF or SPORT handling

mode SPORT= Suspension setting COMFORT, SPORT orSPORT +

SETUP shows the drive program, ESP® (Elec-tronic Stability Program) mode and the suspen-sion setting.X Press= or; on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.

X Press9 repeatedly until SETUP is shown.orX Briefly press the AMG button on the centerconsole (Y page 161).

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.

: Lap; RACETIMERYou can start theRACETIMERwhen the engine isrunning or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.X Press= or; on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER appears.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. Time.X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is shown for five sec-onds.

Menus and submenus 201

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteenlaps. The 16th lap can only be completed withFinish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steering wheel.X Pressa to confirm Yes.The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop thevehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 inthe ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 3and then pressa to confirm Start, timing iscontinued.

Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press= or; to select Reset Lap.X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.

You cannot delete individual stored laps. If youhave stopped 16 laps, the current lap does nothave to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm Reset.Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-function display.

X Press: Yes to select and confirm witha.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speedIf you store at least one lap and stop the RACE-TIMER, an overall evaluation will then be availa-ble.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation appears.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapIf you store at least two laps and stop the RACE-TIMER, the lap evaluation function thenbecomes available.

202 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press= or; on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.

X Press9 repeatedly until the lap evaluationappears.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. Thefastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select a dif-ferent lap evaluation.

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manualand may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-prioritydisplay messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, thecorresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 157)RParking (Y page 141)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel.The multifunction display hides the display message.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority displaymessages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messageshave been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You can call upthe display messages:X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 203

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) are temporarily not available.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

204 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

T!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-tioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lockif you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Please Release Park‐ing Brake

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.

Display messages 205

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Restart the engine.

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusInoperativeCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative dueto a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFEInoperative SeeOperator's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

206 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

PRE-SAFEFunctions CurrentlyLimited See Opera‐tor's Manual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snowRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivatedRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Restart the engine.X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP® on again (Y page 71).

PRE-SAFEFunctions LimitedSee Operator's Man‐ual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a mal-function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 207

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Radar Sensors DirtySee Operator's Man‐ualThe radar sensor system is malfunctioning.Possible causes are:RDirt on sensorsRHeavy rain or snowRWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,e.g. in desert-like areas

At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioningor is temporarily unavailable:RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRPRE-SAFE® PLUSRActive Lane Keeping AssistRActive Blind Spot AssistRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go PilotIf the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist willnot perform a course-correcting brake application.A warning tone also sounds.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving anddrive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-appears.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Switch off the engine.X Clean all sensors (Y page 274).X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

6SRS Malfunction Ser‐vice Required

The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp alsolights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on restraint systems (Y page 41).

208 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequiredorFrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system hasmalfunctioned at the front on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequiredorRearRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionServiceRequiredorRightSide Curtain AirbagMalfunction ServiceRequired

The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 209

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Air‐bag DisabledSee Operator's Man‐ual

The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag aredeactivated during the journey, although:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seatIf additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpretthe occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag doesnot deploy in the event of an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,the OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag(Y page 49)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-tifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampremains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).

Front Passenger Air‐bag Enabled The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag areenabled during the journey, although:

210 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsSee Operator's Man‐ual

Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system'sweight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe systemmay detect objects or forces applying additional weight onthe seat.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag maydeploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultane-ously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lampmust then light up andremain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, theOCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 49)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Man‐ual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator'sManual display messages must not be shown in the multifunctiondisplay

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampremains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).

Display messages 211

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bCheck Left Low Beam

The bulb in question is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

i LED light sources: the display message for the correspondinglamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

bActive HeadlampsInoperative

The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tonealso sounds.X Turn the light switch to positionÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogX Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Availablemessage is displayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

212 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

+Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Man‐ual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 268).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the enginecoolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

? The fan motor is malfunctioning.X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catchfire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhichcan occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out andthe coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, theengine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Display messages 213

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

#See Operator's Man‐ual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level istoo low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Observe the instructions in the# See Operator's Manualdisplay message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine Oil AtNext Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 267).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 267).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if theengine oil needs topping up more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart)(USA)Check EngineOil Level (Add 1Liter)(Canada)

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 267).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 267).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if theengine oil needs topping up more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

214 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

4Engine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine Off

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. There is a riskof engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 267).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 267).

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Close Gas Cap

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÀAttention Assist:Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue ora lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone alsosounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Vehicle Rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

¨Vehicle RisingPlease Wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warningtone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

Display messages 215

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

¨Stop Vehicle Vehi‐cle Too Low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

AIRMATIC is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fenderor the tires could be damaged if the steeringmovement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehi-cle.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Malfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling charac-teristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogX Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign AssistInoperative Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 157).

216 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Lane Keeping AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManualorActive LaneKeeping Assist Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated andtemporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthere have been no lane markings for an extended periodRthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping AssistInoperativeorActiveLane Keeping AssistInoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManualorActiveBlind Spot AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistInoperativeorActiveBlind Spot AssistInoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fas-tened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and thedriver's door closed.

Display messages 217

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You have inadvertently touched themultifunction steeringwheel whilesteering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 165).

Park Assist Inoper‐ative You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneu-vers.Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximatelyten minutes (Y page 165).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Switch off and restart the engine.If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, DISTRONIC PLUS has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 149)

DISTRONIC PLUS NowAvailable DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarilyunavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149).

218 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐erative DISTRONIC PLUS is malfunctioningThe following may have also failed:RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic AssistRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRSteering Assist and Stop&Go PilotA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐pended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149).

Display messages 219

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DTR+: SteeringAssist. CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthere have been no lane markings for an extended periodRthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: SteeringAssist. Inoperative Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are defective.However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Inop‐erative Cruise control is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20mph (30 km/h), for example.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and storethe speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 148).

Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 148).

220 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

CheckTire Pressure Soon

The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant lossin pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installednew wheels and tires.Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 278).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-sure is correct (Y page 299).

Check Tire PressureThen Restart RunFlat Indicator

The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display messageand has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 299).

Run Flat IndicatorInoperative

The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

CorrectTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 299).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 302).

Display messages 221

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

CheckTires

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 278).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 299).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

WarningTire Malfunction

The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 278).

Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavaila‐ble

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, nosignals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressuremonitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the mul-tifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop.

222 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Tire Pressure Moni‐tor Inoperative NoWheel SensorsThe wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Thetire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving fora few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine:

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-tion R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

To Shift from 'P'Apply Brake

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi-tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N,Depress Brake andStart Engine

With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-mission out of position P or N into another transmission position.X Depress the brake pedal.X Start the engine.

Risk of Rolling AwayVehicle Not in 'P'

The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is inposition R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shiftto 'P' when Vehicleis Stationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Display messages 223

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Service Required DoNot Shift GearsVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-mission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Poss.Service Required

You cannot shift into the transmission positionR due to amalfunction.The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-nents.A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi-tion N.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch offthe engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

224 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

_Rear Left BackrestNot LatchedorRearRight Backrest NotLatched

The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiverrange.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appearsin the multifunction display.

ÐPower Steering Mal‐function See Opera‐tor's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped belowthe minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 269).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÂKey Does Not Belongto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.a warning tone soundsX Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplace Key Battery

The battery of the KEYLESS-GO key is discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 79).

Display messages 225

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ÂDon't Forget YourKey

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock. You have opened thedriver's door with the engine switched off. a warning tone soundsThe multifunction display shows the display message a maximum of60 seconds and is simply a reminder.X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leavethe vehicle.

ÂKey Not Detected(red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-trally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

A strong source of radio waves is causing interference and this ispreventing the KEYLESS-GO key from being recognized when theengine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKeymode.

ÂKey Not Detected(white display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.X Change the location of the KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂRemove 'Start' But‐ton and Insert Key

The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warningtone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicatorand warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicatorand warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine orwhilst driving.

226 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten theirseat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, awarning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as thedriver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15mph(25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 227

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp islit while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds.You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake.The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp islit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect ismalfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay beaffected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp islit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThere is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.The braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

228 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, suchas the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

$J֌!

N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake systemwarning lamp andthe yellow ESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine isrunning.ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 229

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or the traction control system has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 70), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 69).

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. ActiveBlind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica-tions.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 70), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 69).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.

÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP®OFFwarning lamps are lit while the engine is running.ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

230 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handlingmode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (Y page 71).

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Observe the additional information on restraint systems (Y page 41).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 231

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergencymode.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop assoon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legalrequirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legalregulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and thecoolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

232 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked orthe electric engine radiator fan may be defective.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 268).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,and stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engineradiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids whichmay have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occurjust by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 268).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 233

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is inmotion. A warningtone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line oftravel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

Observe the additional information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 72).Observe the additional information on the distancewarning function of COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 67).

234 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale forthe TPMS (pressure loss or malfunction) is lit.The tire pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-tion.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Payattention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire(Y page 278).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 299).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 235

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

General notes

The multimedia system section in this Opera-tor's Manual describes the basic principles foroperation. More information can be found in theDigital Operator's Manual.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.The multimedia system calculates the route tothe destination without taking the following intoaccount, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and yield signsRparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulationsThe multimedia system may give incorrect nav-igation recommendations if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with thedigital map's data.For example:Ra diverted routeRthe road layout or the direction of a one-waystreet has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe roadand traffic rules and regulations during yourjourney. Road and traffic rules and regulationsalways have priority over multimedia systemdriving recommendations.Navigation announcements are intended todirect you while driving without diverting yourattention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con-sulting the map display for directions. Lookingat the icons ormap display can distract you fromtraffic conditions and driving, and increase therisk of an accident.This equipment complies with FCC radiationexposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels of RF energythat is deemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-ever, it is recommended to install it at a distanceof at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between theradiation source and a person's body (notincluding limbs such as hands, wrists, feet andlegs).

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric-ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.You will notice this, for example, because eitheryou will not be able to select certain menu itemsor a message will appear to this effect.

236 Function restrictionsMultim

ediasystem

Operating system

Overview

General notes! Do not use the space in front of the displayfor storage. Objects placed here could dam-age the display or impair its function. Avoidany direct contact with the display surface.Pressure on the display surface may result inimpairments to the display, which could beirreversible.

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair yourability to read the display.The display has an automatic temperature-con-trolled switch-off feature. The brightness isautomatically reduced if the temperature is toohigh. The display may temporarily switch offcompletely.

Cleaning instructions! Do not touch the display. The display has avery sensitive high-gloss surface; there is arisk of scratching. If you have to clean thescreen, however, use a mild cleaning agentand a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and havecooled down before you start cleaning. Do notapply pressure to the display surface whencleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-age to the display.

Switching the multimedia systemon/offX Press the q control knob.

Adjusting the volumeX Turn the q control knob.The volume is adjusted:Rfor the currently selected media sourceRduring traffic or navigation announcementsRin hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on or offX Press the8 button on the control panel.If the audio output is switched off, the statusline will show the8 symbol. If you switch

themedia source or set the volume, the soundis automatically switched on.i Navigation announcements will be heardeven if the sound is muted.

FunctionsThe multimedia system has the following func-tions:RRadio modeRMedia mode with media searchRSound systemsRNavigation systemCOMAND: navigation via the hard driveAudio 20: navigation via SD cardRCommunication functionsRSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)RVehicle functions with system settingsRFavorites functions

ControllerThe controller in the center console lets you:Rselect menu items on the displayRenter charactersRselect a destination on the mapRsave entriesThe controller can be:Rturned3Rslid left or right1Rslid forwards or back4Rslid diagonally2Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back buttonYou can use the% button to exit amenu or tocall up the basic display of the current operatingmode.X To exit the menu: briefly press the%button.The multimedia system changes to the nexthigher menu level in the current operatingmode.

X To call up the basic display: press the%button for longer than two seconds.The multimedia system changes to the basicdisplay of the current operating mode.

Operating system 237

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favoritesX To call up: press theg button on the con-troller.

X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.The favorites are displayed.

X To exit: press theg button again.

Adding favorites

Adding a predefined favorite

: Adds a new favorite; Renames a selected favorite= Moves a selected favorite? Deletes a selected favoriteX Press theg button.X Slide6 the controller.The menu bar is shown.

X Select Reassign.The categories are displayed.

X Select a category.The favorites are displayed.

X Select a favorite.X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Adding your own favoriteX Select VehicleQClimate Control.X Press and hold theg button until thefavorites are displayed.

X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Navigation mode

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the navigation system.

General notesAmong other things, correct functioning of thenavigation systemdepends onGPS reception. Incertain situations, GPS reception may beimpaired, there may be interference or theremay be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels orparking garages.Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT(see themanufacturer's operating instructions).The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructionsare stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SDcard box contains a quick guide.The following descriptions apply to navigationwith COMAND. Further information can befound in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route optionsMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.Notes for route types:REco RouteRDynamic Traffic RouteTraffic reports on the route for the route guid-ance are taken into account (not available inall countries).

238 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

RDynamic TRF. Route After RequestYou can decide whether or not current trafficreports should be included in the route cal-culation (not available in all countries).RCalculate Alternative RoutesDifferent routes are being calculated. In orderto do so, instead of Start, select the menuitem Continue.

X To avoid/use route options: select AvoidOptions.

X Select a route option.Notes for route options:RUse Toll RoadsThe route calculation includes roads whichrequire you to pay a usage fee (toll).RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:(only available in the USA)Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the accessconditions for carpool lanes.Carpool lanes will be included if the carpoollanes option is activated.

Entering an addressMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.Enter an address, e.g. as follows:Rcity or ZIP code, street, house numberRstate/province, city or ZIP codeRcity or ZIP code, centerRstreet, city or ZIP code, intersectionX Select City.The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.Below this, you will see locations for whichroute guidance has already been carried out.

X Enter the city.TheG symbol: the location is contained onthe digital map multiple times.

X To switch to the list: slide the5 control-ler.

X Select the location.If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there aredifferent ZIP codes available for the location,

the corresponding digits are displayedwith anX.X Enter the street and house number.The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry:Rsearch for a keywordThe keyword search finds destinations usingfragments of words.Rselect the last destinationRselect a contactRselect a POIYou can search for a POI by location, name ortelephone number.Rselect destination on the mapRenter intermediate destinationYou can map the route to the destinationyourself with up to four intermediate destina-tions.Rselect destinations from Mercedes-BenzAppsRselect geo-coordinates

Calculating the routePrerequisite: the address has been entered andis in the menu.X Select Start or Continue.The route is calculatedwith the selected routetype and the selected route options.If route guidance has already been activated,a prompt will appear asking whether you wishto end the current route guidance.

X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance orSet as Intermediate Destination.Cancel Active Route Guidance cancelsthe current route guidance and starts routecalculation to the new destination.Set as Intermediate Destination addsthe new destination in addition to the existingdestination and opens the intermediate des-tinations list.

Connecting a mobile phone

PrerequisitesFor telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, yourequire a Bluetooth®-capablemobile phone. Themobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile1.0 or above.

Operating system 239

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Multimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQActivate Bluetooth.X Activate Bluetooth® O.Mobile phone:X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue-tooth® visibility for other devices (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth® device names for all of oneman-ufacturer's products might be identical. Tomake it possible to clearly identify your mobilephone, change the device name (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (PhoneBook Access Profile) and MAP (MessageAccess Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-ing information will be transmitted after youconnect:RPhone bookRCall listsRText messages and e-mail

i Further information on suitable mobilephones can be found at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

i In the USA, you can get in touch with theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centeron 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing (connect-ing) a mobile phoneBefore using your mobile phone with the multi-media system for the first time, you will need tosearch for the phone and then authorize (con-nect) it. Depending on themobile phone, author-ization either takes place by means of SecureSimple Pairing or by entering a passkey. Themultimedia system automatically makes theprocedure that is relevant for yourmobile phoneavailable. The mobile phone is always connec-ted automatically after authorization. Furtherinformation on using a mobile phone with themultimedia system (see the Digital Operator'sManual).If the multimedia system does not detect yourmobile phone, this may be due to particularsecurity settings on your mobile phone (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

Only one mobile phone can be connected to themultimedia system at any one time.Searching for a mobile phoneMultimedia system:X Select Tel/®QConnectDeviceQSearch for PhonesQStartSearch.The available mobile phones are displayed.

Symbols in the device list

Sym-bol

Explanation

Ï New mobile phone found, not yetauthorized.

Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but isnot connected

# Mobile phone is authorized andconnected

Connecting a mobile phoneAuthorization using Secure Simple Pairing:X Select mobile phone.A code is displayed in the multimedia systemand on the mobile phone.

X If codesmatch: select Yes on themultimediasystem.

X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-ing on the mobile phone used, confirm theconnection to the multimedia system and forthe PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. Theprompt to confirm may take up to twominutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-er's operating instructions).

X If the codes are different: select No on themultimedia system.The process is canceled.Repeat authorization.

Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):X Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobilephone.The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-nation as a passkey.

X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.X Press ¬ to confirm.X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobilephone. Depending on the mobile phone used,confirm the connection to themultimedia sys-

240 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®profiles. The prompt to confirm may take upto two minutes to be displayed (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).

Switching between mobile phonesIf you have authorized more than one mobilephone, you can switch between the individualphones.Multimedia system:X Select Connect Device.X Select a mobile phone from the device list.

Media mode

General notesIf you wish to play external media sources, thedefault display must already be turned on. Fur-ther information on media mode (see the DigitalOperator's Manual).The following external media sources can beused:RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)(Y page 241)RCDRDVD (COMAND)RSD cardsRvia devices connected by Bluetooth®

i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVDchanger (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Using the device listMultimedia system:X Select MediaQDevices.The available media sources will be shown.The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the media source.Playable files are played.

Inserting/removing an SD card

Important safety notesG WARNINGSD cards are small parts. They can be swal-lowed and cause choking. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-tion immediately.

! If you are no longer using the SD card, youshould remove it and store it outside the vehi-cle. High temperatures can damage the card.

Inserting an SD cardThe SD card slot is on the control panel.X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot untilthe SD card engages. The side with the con-tacts must face downwards.

Removing an SD cardX Press the SD card.The SD card is ejected.

X Remove the SD card.

Connecting USB devices

There are two USB ports in the stowage spaceunder the armrest.X Connect the USB device to the USB port.X Select the media source (Y page 241).

Operating system 241

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicleare dependent on the distribution of the loadwithin the vehicle. For this reason, you shouldobserve the following notes when transporting aload:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle mass or the gross axle weightrating for the vehicle (including occupants).The values are specified on the vehicle iden-

tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver'sdoor.RThe trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the trunk as possible.RThe load must not protrude above the upperedge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear or frontseat backrests. Make sure that the seatbackrests are securely locked into place.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-rials appropriate for the weight and size of theload.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges forprotection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 242).

242 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards untilit engages.

The glove box can only be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key.X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise toposition1.

Eyeglasses compartment

There is a compartment to stow eyeglasses inthe headliner on the driver's side.X To open: pull down eyeglasses compart-ment: by the handle.

Stowage compartments in the center con-sole

Mercedes-AMG vehiclesX Briefly press trim:.i The stowage tray can be removed.

All other models

Stowage areas 243

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To open: slide the cover forwards by han-dle: in the direction of the arrow until itengages.

X To close: briefly press the front of handle:.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: pull handle: up.The armrest folds out.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-lowing may be in the stowage space:Ran SD card slotRamultimedia connector unit with 2USB ports,e.g. for iPod®, iPhone® orMP3 player (see theseparate operating instructions)Ra mobile phone bracket

Stowage compartment under the frontseatsG WARNINGIf you exceed the maximum load for the stow-age compartment, the cover may not be ableto restrain the items. Itemsmay be thrown outof the stowage compartment and hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Never exceed the maximum permissible loadfor the stowage compartment. Stow andsecure heavy objects in the trunk.

The maximum permissible load of the stowagecompartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).

X To open: pull handle: up and fold cover;forwards.

i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the fireextinguisher is located in the stowage com-partment under the driver's seat.

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartments in the rear centerconsole

X To open: slide cover: or; in the directionof the arrow.

i There is a 12 V socket in the front stowagecompartment.

Stowage compartment in the rear seatarmrest! Do not sit on or support your body weight onthe rear seat armrest when it is folded down,as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cover of the stowage compart-ment before folding the rear seat armrestback into the seat backrest.

244 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

X To open: fold down seat armrest;.X Fold cover: of the armrest upwards.

Stowage netsStowage nets are located in the front-passengerfootwell and on the left-hand side of the trunk.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 242)and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces(Y page 242).

Rear bench seat through-loading fea-ture

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot berestrained by the seat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 242).

The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrestscan be folded down separately to increase thetrunk capacity.

Folding the seat backrest forwardX Vehicles without memory function: if neces-sary, move the driver's or front-passengerseat forwards.

X Vehicles with memory function: when one orboth parts of the rear seat backrest are foldedforwards, the respective front seat moves for-wards slightly, when necessary, in order toavoid contact.When the engine is running, the driver's seatdoes not move forward.

X Open the trunk.X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrestrelease handle:.The corresponding rear seat backrest isreleased.

X Fold rear seat backrest; forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Stowage areas 245

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Folding the seat backrest back! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat for-wards if necessary.

X Fold rear seat backrest: back until itengages.If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in the multifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster. A warningtone also sounds.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

i You should always engage the rear seatbackrests if you do not need the through-loading feature. This will prevent unauthor-ized access to the trunk from the vehicle inte-rior.

Securing loads

Cargo tie-down ringsObserve the following notes on securing loads:RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 242).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure aload, as these are only intended as an anti-slipprotection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges orcorners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Cargo tie-down rings:

EASY-PACK trunk box

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the load surface moves up, your handsmay become trapped on the frame of theEASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury.When the load surface moves up, make surethat your hands are not within the sweep ofthe load surface. If someone becomes trap-ped, carefully push the center of the load sur-face downward.

! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is exten-ded, objects may neither be placed on theframe of the box nor pushed down onto theframe from above. The box may otherwise bedamaged.

! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects candamage the EASY-PACK trunk box andmay bethrown out. There is a risk of injury.Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed orfragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.Always store and secure these or similarobjects in the trunk outside the EASY-PACKtrunk box.

! If you exceed the maximum permitted loadof the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects may bethrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk box andstrike vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.Always observe the maximum permitted loadof the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always store

246 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

and secure heavy objects in the trunk outsidethe EASY-PACK trunk box.

The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACKtrunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load of aboveapproximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bottom of thebox moves downward until it rests on the mat ofthe trunk floor. Thus, overloading of the box isavoided.

Adjusting the height to any position

X Pull the box out by the handle: in the direc-tion of the arrow as far as it will go.

X Lowering the load surface: push the centerof load surface; down by hand in the direc-tion of the arrow until load surface; hasreached the desired position and the box isthe desired size.

X To raise the load surface: press switch=.Load surface; of the box moves up auto-matically.

X To stow the box: push the box in by the han-dle: as far as it will go.

Removing and installing

X To install: insert retainer; of box: intoslots=

X Raise box: and press hooksA into anchor-age? as far as they will go.

X Turn left-hand rotating catchB clockwiseand right-hand rotating catchB counter-clockwise by 90°.

X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catchBcounter-clockwise and right-hand rotatingcatchB clockwise by 90°.

X Move box: downwards and pull it out fromanchorages?.

i Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flatsurface after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf.

Stowage well under the trunk floor! Unhook the handle before again before clos-ing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to pre-vent the handle flap from protruding. Other-wise, you could damage the handle.

The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.X To open: pull handle: up.

Stowage areas 247

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Hook handle: into rain trough;.

X Hook handle: into rain trough;.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse roof carriers that have been tested andapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Thishelps to prevent damage to the vehicle.Position the load on the roof carrier in such away that the vehicle will not sustain damageeven when it is in motion.Ensure that, depending on the vehicle'sequipment, you can raise the sliding sunroof

fully and open the trunk lid fully when the roofcarrier is installed.

! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers,do not use metallic or hard objects to openthem.

You will find information on the maximum roofload in the "Technical data" section(Y page 328).An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof loadmay become detached from the vehicle. Youmust therefore ensure that you observe the roofcarrier manufacturer's installation instructions.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Open covers: carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchoragepoints under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.

248 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cupholder in the center console to continuous,strong and direct sunlight. The passengercompartment in the area of the center con-sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-centrated and reflected sunlight.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 242).

Cup holder in the front center console

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Cup holder; CoverYou can remove the rubber mat of the cupholder in the direction of the arrow to clean it.Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.X To open: slide cover; to its foremost posi-tion.

All other models: Cup holderYou can remove the cup holder's rubber mat forcleaning. Cleanwith clear, lukewarmwater only.

Cup holder in the rear-compartmentcenter console

X To open: slide cover: forwards.X To remove the insert: slide catch; inwardsin the direction of the arrow.

X Remove cup holder insert= upwards.X To re-install the insert: place the insert inthe stowage space.

X Slide catch; outwards in the direction of thearrow until it engages.

You can remove the insert and the rubbermat ofthe cup holder to clean them. Clean them withclean, lukewarm water only.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest! Do not sit on or support your body weight onthe rear seat armrest when it is folded down,as you could otherwise damage it.

Features 249

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

! Close the cup holder before folding the rearseat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holdercould be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.X Press release catch:.Cup holder; folds out forwards.

X Swing the rear seat armrest cover back down,if necessary.

X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.Swing cup holder; back until it engages.

Bottle holder

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 242).

! Make sure that any bottles weighing morethan 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the bottleholder, rest on the vehicle floor. The bottleholder could otherwise be damaged.

X Press the outer edge of button: and slide inthe direction of the arrow until the bottle fitsinto the opening.

X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with acapacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l).The bottle holder does not secure the bottles; itmerely prevents them from tipping over.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

250 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light: only functions if the sun visor isclipped into bracket; and mirror coverA hasbeen folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: out of retainer;.

X Swing sun visor: to the side.X Slide sun visor: horizontally as required.

Rear window roller sunblind

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could be trapped in thesweep of the roller sunblind when the rollersunblind is extended or retracted. There is arisk of injury.When extending or retracting make sure thatno parts of the body are in the sweep of theroller sunblind. Briefly press the button againif someone becomes trapped. The opening orclosing process is briefly stopped. The rollersunblind then returns to its initial position.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind can movefreely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or otherobjects could be damaged.

Retracting or extending from thedriver’s seat

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 123).

X To extendor retract: briefly press button:.The roller sunblind fully extends or fullyretracts.

X To stop: briefly press button: again.The roller sunblind stops briefly and movesback into the out-of-use position.

Features 251

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Ashtray

Front ashtray! The stowage space under the ashtray is notheat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes inthe ashtray, make sure that the ashtray isproperly engaged. Otherwise, the stowagespace could be damaged.

Mercedes-AMG vehiclesX To open: briefly press the trim on cover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X To remove the insert: slide insert; for-wards in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove insert;.X To re-install the insert: place the insert intothe holder and press it in the opposite direc-tion of the arrow until it engages.

X To close: fold down cover:.

All other modelsX To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X To remove the insert: hold insert= by theribbing at the sides and lift it up; and out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert= intothe holder until it engages.

X To close: briefly press cover: at the front.The cover moves back.

You can remove the ashtray insert and use theresulting compartment for stowage.

Rear compartment ashtray

X To open: slide cover; forwards.X To remove the insert: pull insert: up andout.

X To install the insert: install insert: into theholder from above and press down into theholder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

252 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighterwhen road and traffic conditions permit.

Cigarette lighter in the front compart-ment

Mercedes-AMG vehiclesX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X To open: briefly press the trim on cover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter;will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

All other modelsX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter;will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: briefly press cover: at the front.The cover moves back.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

The sockets can be used for accessories with amaximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessoriesinclude such items as chargers for mobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods when theengine is switched off, the battery may dis-charge.An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-ets is automatically cut. This ensures that thereis sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket in the front center console

Mercedes-AMG vehiclesX To open: briefly press the trim on cover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: fold down cover:.

All other models

Features 253

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: briefly press cover: at the front.The cover moves back.

Socket in the rear compartment centerconsole

X Slide cover; forwards.X Lift up the cover of socket:.

mbrace

General notesThe mbrace system is only available in the USA.You must have a license agreement to activatethembrace service. Make sure that your systemis activated and operational. To log in, press theï MB Info call button. If any of the stepsmentioned are not carried out, the system maynot be activated.If you have questions about the activation, con-tact one of the following telephone hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password will besent to you by mail. You can use this passwordto log onto the mbrace area under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.

The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableDetermining the location of the vehicle on amapis only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to theCustomer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the multi-function steering wheel.

orX Use the multimedia system volume control.The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callYou can find information and a description of allavailable features under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, the sys-tem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detectedif one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does notcome on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosisof the system.

254 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-lowing buttons continues to light up red afterthe system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐ative or Service not activatedmessageappears in the multifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. In theevent of an emergency, help will have to besummoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestMercedes-Benz Service Center or contact thefollowing service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notesObserve the notes on system activation(Y page 254).An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-

gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been initi-ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting… message appears inthe multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, the Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determinedby the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been initi-ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-lished between theCustomer AssistanceCenterand the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerattempts to get more information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-pants, an ambulance is immediately sent tothe vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,the system has been unable to initiate an emer-gency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. The indi-cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-ously.The Call could not be connected messageappears in the multifunction display and mustbe confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Features 255

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press and hold the SOS button for at least onesecond;.The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashesuntil the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emergencycall. If you leave the vehicle immediately afterpressing SOS button;, you do not know ifmbrace has successfully made the emergencycall. In this case, always summon assistance byother means.

Roadside Assistance button

X To call: press Roadside Assistance but-ton:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears in the

multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on the multimedia system, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 259).The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz tech-nician or makes arrangements for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest Mercedes-BenzService Center.You may be charged for services such as repairwork and/or towing.You can find more information in the separatembrace manual.The system has not been able to initiate a Road-side Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistancecall button F is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

256 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

MB Info call button

X To call MB Info: pressMB Info call button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info call button:flashes while the connection is being made.The Connecting Call message appears inthe multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-vice Center and about other products and serv-ices from Mercedes-Benz.You can find further information on the mbracesystem under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

The system has not been able to initiate an MBInfo call, if:Rthe indicator lamp inMB Info call button ïis flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergency callcan still be initiated. In this case, an emergencycall will take priority and override all other activecalls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steeringwheelRthe corresponding button in the multimediasystem to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted.The mobile phone is no longer connected to themultimedia system.However, if you want to use your mobile phone,do so only when the vehicle is stationary and ina safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you access to adatabase with over 15 million points of interest(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-gation system in your vehicle. If you know thedestination, the address can be downloaded.Alternatively, you can obtain the location of

Features 257

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinationsin the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes with upto four way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidance tothe address entered.X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.

The destination download function is availableif:Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-tem.Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-ble and data transfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of thembrace PLUS Packageand cannot be purchased separately.You can use the route assistance function evenif the vehicle is not equipped with a navigationsystem.Within the framework of this service, you receivea professional and reliable form of navigationsupport without having to leave your vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-rent position and the desired destination. Youwill then be guided live through the current routesection.

Search & Send

General notesTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle must beequipped with mbrace and a navigation system.Additionally, an mbrace service subscriptionmust be completed."Search & Send" is a destination entry service. Adestination address which is found on GoogleMaps® can be transferred via mbrace directly toyour vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://maps.google.comand enter a destination address into the entryfield.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on theweb-site.Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address willbe sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specified whensetting up your mbrace account into the cor-responding field.

X Click "Send".Information on specific commands such as"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on thewebsite.

Calling up a transmitted destinationaddressX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).The transmitted destination address is loadedinto the vehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, asking whethernavigation should be started.

X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.If you have sent more than one destinationaddress, each individual destination must beconfirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the sameorder as the order in which they were sent.If you ownmultipleMercedes-Benz vehicleswithmbrace and activated mbrace accounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination will besent to all the vehicles.

258 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle and areplacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlockingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-able and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed uponwith the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,Android™)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote-closing feature can be usedwhen you have forgotten to lock the vehicle andyou are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately remotely lockedwithin four days of the ignition being turned off.After this time, remote closing may be delayedby 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehiclecan no longer be valet locked remotely.The vehicle remote closing feature is available ifthe relevant mobile phone network is availableand a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and youswitch on the ignition, the Doors LockedRemotelymessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,Android™)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centertogether with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercontacts you and the local law enforcementagency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agency isinformed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated forlonger than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center is automaticallynotified.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problems with your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center.The customer service representative can usethe received data to decide what kind of assis-tance is required. You are then, for example,guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz ServiceCenter or a recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred during anMB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this isinitiated by the Customer Assistance Center.

Features 259

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

You will see the Breakdown Assistance Con‐nected message in the display. If the remotemalfunction diagnosis can be started, theRequest for Vehicle DiagnosticsReceived Start vehicle diagnostics?message appears in the display.X Press the Yes button to confirm themessage.X When the Vehicle Diagnostics PleaseStart Ignition message appears: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 123).

X If the Please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehi‐cle to a safe position. messageappears: please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehicle to asafe position.The message in the display disappears.The vehicle operating state check begins. Youwill see the Vehicle Diagnostics Activemessage.If you select Cancel, the remote malfunctiondiagnosis is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐nection may be interrupted duringdata transfer)message appears. The vehicledata can now be sent.X Press the OK button to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ring Data... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-tion is re-established after the transfer is com-plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at alater time by another means, e.g. by e-mail orphone.Another function of the Vehicle Health Check isthe transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistanceCenter. If a service is due, the displayshows a message to this effect together withinformation about any special offers at yourworkshop.This information can also be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 30).

Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 27).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transfer andsave predefined routes in the navigation sys-tem.A route can be prepared and sent by either acustomer service representative or under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Each route can include up to four way points.Once a route has been received by the naviga-tion system, you will see the Do you want tostart route guidance? DestinationReceived destination has been savedin "Previous destinations". message onthe multimedia system display.The route is saved.X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in the dis-play.If you select No, the saved route can be calledup later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Route guidance starts.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called upagain.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-tance Center. The Customer Assistance Centerthen forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-dedRthe time at which the speed limit was excee-dedRthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

260 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areaswhich thevehicle should not enter or leave. You will beinformed if the vehicle crosses the boundariesof the selected areas. You can select the way inwhich you receive this information beforehand.Possible options include textmessage, e-mail oran automated call.The area can be determined as either a circle ora polygon with a maximum of ten corners. Youcan specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-ferent settings are possible for each area.These settings can be called up under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger anMB Info call andinform the customer service representative thatyou wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated by textmessage.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehicle'spanic alarm via text message. An alarm soundsand the exterior lighting flashes. Depending onthe setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notesThe HomeLink® garage door opener integratedin the rear-view mirror allows you to operate upto three different door and gate systems.Use the integrated garage door opener only ongarage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operating instruc-tions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integrated garage

door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free ofcharge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or com-patible products is also available online athttp://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 28).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 261).

Features 261

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Garage door remote controlA is not includedwith the integrated garage door opener.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to con-trol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the integratedgarage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon asbutton;,= or? is stored for the first time.If the selected button has already been pro-gramed, indicator lamp: will only light upyellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towards but-tons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The rolling codemust be synchronized (Y page 262).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.

Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 261).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror. To do this youwillneed to use the programming button on the doordrive control panel. The programming buttonmay be located in different places depending onthe manufacturer. It is usually located on thedoor drive unit on the garage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage door driveoperating instructions, e.g. under "Program-ming additional remote controls", before carry-ing out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of the garagedoor or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects arepresent within the sweep of the door or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiatethe next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openerrepeatedly and in quick succession until thedoor closes.The rolling code synchronization is then com-plete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a "break"(or interruption) of the transmission signalsafter broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,these signals may not last long enough for theintegrated garage door opener. The signal is notrecognized during programming. Comparablewith Canadian law, someU.S. garage door open-ers also feature a "break".

262 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of where youlive) when using the programming steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on theintegrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lights upyellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote con-trolA for two seconds, then release it for twoseconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remotecontrolA until indicator lamp: lights upgreen.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of thegarage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instruc-tions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitter fre-quency can usually be found on the back ofremote controlA for the garage door drive.The garage door opener is compatible withdevices which operate in the frequency rangeof 280 to 433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door remotecontrolA. This increases the likelihood that

garage door remote controlA will transmit astrong and precise signal to the integratedgarage door opener.RWhen programming, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles and from but-tons; to?which you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle butat varying distances.RIf another remote controlA is available forthe same garage door drive, repeat the sameprogramming steps with this remote controlA. Before performing these steps,make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only transmitfor a limited amount of time (the indicatorlamp on the remote control goes out). PressbuttonB on remote controlA again beforetransmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function of thegarage door system remote control. Please alsoread the operating instructions for the garagedoor system.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-cator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal as longas the button is pressed. The transmission ishalted after a maximum of ten seconds andindicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if necessary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before selling thevehicle.

Features 263

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Slide the relevant seat back.X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers;.X Remove the floormat.

264 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation area

Rremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshield wip-ers or the hood.

Engine compartment 265

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle;up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a height ofapproximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and close itwith a little more force.

RadiatorDo not cover up the radiator, such as with athermal mat or insect protection cover. Thereadings of the on-board-diagnostic systemmayotherwise be inaccurate. Some of these read-ings are required by law andmust be accurate atall times.

Engine oil

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.

266 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption maybe higher than this when the vehicle is new or ifyou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstickmay bein a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surfaceRthe engine should be switched off for approx-imately five minutes if the engine is at normaloperating temperatureRif the engine is not at normal operating tem-perature, e.g. if the engine was only startedbriefly, wait about 30minutes before carryingout the measurement

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tubeto the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= and MAXmark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= orbelow, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Adding engine oil

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Use only engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicleswith a service system. Alist of the engine oils and oil filters that havebeen tested and approved in accordance withMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts is available at any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.The following cause engine failure or damageto the exhaust system:RUse of engine oils and oil filters that havenot been expressly approved for the servicesystemRReplacement of engine oil and oil filter afterthe replacement interval specified by theservice system has expiredRUse of engine oil additives

! Do not add too much oil. adding too muchengine oil can result in damage to the engineor to the catalytic converter. Have excessengine oil siphoned off.

ExampleX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and tightenclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick(Y page 267).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 325).

Engine compartment 267

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Additional service products

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.

Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

Checking coolant level

ExampleX Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 123).

X Check the coolant temperature display in theinstrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

orX Press the Start/Stop button once on vehicleswith KEYLESS-GO (Y page 123).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clock-wise and allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) abovemarker bar= in the filler neckwhenwarm, there is enough coolant in expan-sion tank;.

268 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X If necessary, add coolant that has been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far asit will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 326).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system/headlamp cleaningsystem

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

ExampleX To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-mended minimum fluid level of 1.1 US qt(1.0 liter), a message appears in the multifunc-tion display prompting you to add washer fluid(Y page 225).Further information on washer fluid(Y page 327).

Maintenance

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-let).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).The ASSYST PLUS service interval display doesnot show any information on the engine oil level.Observe the notes on the engine oil level(Y page 267).The multifunction display shows a service mes-sage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysRService A DueRService A Overdue by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance until thenext service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, shows the type of ser-vice. A stands for a minor service and B for amajor service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval display doesnot take into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-ule:X Note down the service due date displayed inthe multifunction display before disconnect-ing the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract thebattery disconnection periods from the ser-vice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press thea or% button on the steeringwheel.

Maintenance 269

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by press-ing thea button.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter-val display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval displayhas been inadvertently reset, this setting canbe corrected at a qualified specialist work-shop.Have service work carried out as described intheMaintenance Booklet. This may otherwiselead to increased wear and damage to themajor assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset theASSYST PLUS service interval display after theservice work has been carried out. You can alsoobtain further information on maintenancework, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditions orincreased load on the vehicle, maintenancework must be carried out more frequently, forexample:Rregular city drivingwith frequent intermediatestopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel shortdistancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires must becheckedmore often. Further information can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network isalso available in other countries. You can obtainfurther information from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period oftime directly after cleaning, particularly aftercleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Byheating up the brakes, the brake discs andpads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for along period of time.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

270 CareMaintenance

andcare

After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-ically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (theOFF button has been pressed).Rthewindshield wiper switch is at position0.Rthe 360° camera or rear view camera isswitched off.

The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! In car washes with a towing mechanism,make sure that the automatic transmission isin transmission position N, otherwise thevehicle could be damaged.RVehicles with a SmartKey:Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock. Do not open the driver's door orfront-passenger door when the engine isswitched off. Otherwise, the automatictransmission selects park position P auto-matically and locks the wheels. You canprevent this by shifting the automatic trans-mission to N beforehand.RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine isswitched off. Otherwise, the automatictransmission selects park position P auto-matically and locks the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in position N:

X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and theignition is switched off.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stopbutton on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe off waxfrom the windshield and the wiper blades. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisescaused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each country.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards theair inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the spongefrequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-work.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damage

Care 271

Maintenance

andcare

Z

to the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information about thecorrect distance is available from the equip-ment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RTiresRDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.RElectrical componentsRBatteryRConnectorsRLampsRSealsRTrimRVentilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical components canlead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequatecare cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover andrinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse offthe treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a

cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recommen-ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is thecase approximately every three to five months,depending on the climate conditions and thecare product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if thepaint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benzshould be used.Do not use these care products in the sun or onthe hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork withunsuitable materialsRfrequent use of automatic car washesRwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishingproducts, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for thepurpose of paintwork care. These productsare only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Theiruse on vehicles with matte paintwork leads toconsiderable surface damage or, more spe-cifically, to shiny, spotted areas.Always have paintwork repairs carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clearmatte finish. This will help you to avoid damageto the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheels witha clear matte finish.The vehicle should ideally be washed by handusing a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty ofwater.

272 CareMaintenance

andcare

Use only insect remover and car shampoo fromthe range of recommended and approvedMercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period oftime directly after cleaning, particularly aftercleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Byheating up the brakes, the brake discs andpads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for along period of time.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. Thereis otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals andpollen may under certain circumstances pre-vent water from draining away. This can leadto corrosion damage and damage to elec-tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning product thatis recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothswhich are suitable for plastic light lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning clothscould scratch or damage the plastic light len-ses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaningagent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

Care 273

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothsthat are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of themirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wetsponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a distanceof at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the power washer nozzle. Informationabout the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems withwater, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear viewcamera and360°camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera or 360° camerawith a power washer.

X Use clean water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens:.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as bathroomcleaner or wheel cleaner.

Impurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may causeflash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of the exhaust pipe bycleaning it regularly, especially in winter andafter washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household cleaningagents

274 CareMaintenance

andcare

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surface whencleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-age to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that itis switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCDdisplay cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibercloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent orsunscreen to come into contact with the plas-tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look ofthe surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and selec-tor leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishesor waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-ing the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum and canlose their shine if chrome polish is used. Usea damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaningthe trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you areunsure as to whether the trim pieces arechrome-plated or not, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Donot use amicrofiber cloth to clean coversmade out of real leather, artificial leather orDINAMICA. If used often, these can damagethe cover.

i Note that regular care is essential to ensurethat the appearance and comfort of the cov-ers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Care 275

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully witha damp cloth and then wipe the coversdown with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwise becomerough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning resultsdepend on the type of dirt and how long ithas been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts byheating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80†)or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush ordry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaningagents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

276 CareMaintenance

andcare

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowagewell under the trunk floor (Y page 247).

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel

: Vehicle tool kit tray; Stowage well= "Minispare" emergency spare wheelX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 247).The vehicle tool kit contains:RFolding wheel chockRFuse allocation chartRJackRAlignment boltROne pair of glovesRLug wrenchRTowing eye

i Example: equipment and country-specificvariations possible.

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Towing eye; Tire sealant filler bottle= Tire inflation compressor? Fuse allocation chartX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 247).

i Example: equipment and country-specificvariations possible.

Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

: Towing eye; One pair of gloves= Jack? Folding wheel chockA Alignment boltB Sheet for faulty wheelC Tire inflation compressorD Lug wrenchE Fuse allocation chartX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 247).

Where will I find...? 277

Breakdow

nassistance

i Example: equipment and country-specificvariations possible.

Vehicleswith alloywheels andhubcapsOn vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps, asocket is also provided.

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-ties) (Y page 278)Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-cles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 277)Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 317)Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.Information on changing and mounting wheels(Y page 312).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 141).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "nor-mal" level is selected (Y page 159).

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock (Y page 123).

X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-gered as they do so. Make sure that no one isnear the danger area while a wheel is being

changed. Anyone who is not directly assistingin the wheel change should, for example,stand behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to trafficconditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires. The affected tire must not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bear-ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 307).MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure loss warningsystem or with an active tire pressure monitor.If a pressure losswarningmessage appearsin the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the display mes-sages (Y page 221).Rcheck the tire for damage.Rif driving on, observe the following notes.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fullyladen it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:RVehicle speedRRoad conditionROutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving conditionsor maneuvers, or it can be increased through amoderate style of driving.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode iscounted from the moment the tire pressure losswarning appears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum permissiblespeed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

278 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

When replacing one or all tires, please observethe following specifications for your vehicle'stires:RsizeRthe type andRthe "MOExtended" markIf a tire has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may beused as a temporary measure. Make sure thatyou use the proper size and type (summer orwinter tires).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! After use, excess tire sealant may run out ofthe filler hose. This could cause stains.

Flat tire 279

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Therefore, place the tire sealant bottle withfiller hose in the plastic bag which is con-tained in the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressorfor longer than eightminutes at a timewithouta break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be operatedagain once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-pressor.

Using the TIREFIT kitX Donot remove any foreign objectswhich havepenetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflationcompressor from the stowage well under-neath the trunk floor (Y page 277).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's field ofvision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull connector? with cable and hoseA outof the tire inflation compressor housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire sealantbottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head downwardsinto recess; of the tire inflation compres-sor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.X Insert plug= into the cigarette lighter socket(Y page 252) or into another 12 V socket inyour vehicle (Y page 253)

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Press on and off switch= on the tire inflationcompressor to position I.The tire inflation compressor is switched on.The tire is inflated.First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. Thepressure can briefly rise to approximately500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximumof fiveminutes. The tire should then

280 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-sure reached" (Y page 281).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure not reached" (Y page 281).If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affectedareas as quickly as possible. Use plain water ifpossible.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, havethem cleaned with perchloroethylene at a drycleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has notbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose isunscrewed.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-imately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres-sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.

You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tiresealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must beaffixed to the instrument cluster in the driver'sfield of vision.If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose isunscrewed.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-tion compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure with thetire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Orcall 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on thetire inflation compressor.

Flat tire 281

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-sure release buttonEnext to pressure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew thefiller hose from the valve of the sealed tire.Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose isunscrewed.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of thesealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-tion compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-shop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hosereplaced as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge are requiredwhen working on the battery, e.g. removal andinstallation. You should therefore have all workinvolving the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS (Y page 64)and ESP® (Y page 69).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-start-ing.Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up ofelectrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-ple:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the car-pet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.

282 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.

Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.

! Always havework on batteries carried out ata qualified specialist workshop. Should it, inexceptional circumstances, be absolutelynecessary to disconnect the 12-volt batteryyourself, observe the following:Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.Rswitch off the ignition.Ralways disconnect the negative terminalclamp first, followed by the positive termi-nal clamp.

After the battery has been disconnected, thetransmission is locked in position P.After the work has been done, install the bat-tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contactwith skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physicianif necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle by

Battery (vehicle) 283

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehicleoccupants from suffering acid burns should thebattery be damaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maximumpossible service life, it must always be suffi-ciently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use the vehicle.In this case, have the battery disconnected at aqualified specialist workshop. You can alsocharge the batterywith a charger recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-ist workshop for further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicleand do not require any electrical consumers.The vehicle will then use very little energy, thusconserving battery power.If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. ifyou reconnect the battery, you will have to:Rset the clock; see the Digital Operator's Man-ualOn vehicles with a multimedia system, thetime is set automatically.Rreset the function for folding the exterior mir-rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir-rors out once (Y page 101).

Charging the battery! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.8 V.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 285).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery in thejump-starting procedure (Y page 285).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do notlean over a battery. Never charge the battery if itis still installed in the vehicle, unless you use abattery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery chargerunit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits thecharging of the battery in its installed position.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor further information and availability. Read thebattery charger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.If thewarning and indicator lamps do not light upon the instrument cluster when temperaturesare low, it is probably because the dischargedbattery has frozen. In this case, you may neithercharge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle.The service life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can beimpaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

284 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If the indicator and warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start thevehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can beimpaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Jump-starting 285

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, theengine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected fora few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clampdo not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must beoff. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 123).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-startingdevice.X Slide cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryB using thejumper cable, always begin with positive terminal; on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.

286 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle using thejumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then from pos-itive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive clamp; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weightof your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 322).

! When Active Brake Assist, Distance PilotDISTRONIC or theHOLD function is activated,the vehicle brakes automatically in certainsituations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivatethese systems in the following or similar sit-uations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could bedamaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, thiscould damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recoverthe vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high, thevehicles could be damaged.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Thiscould damage the vehicle.

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,use the key instead of the Start/Stop button.Otherwise, the automatic transmission mayshift to position P when the driver's or front-passenger door are opened, which could leadto damage to the transmission.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

Towing and tow-starting 287

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximum per-missible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.

It is better to have the vehicle transported thanto have it towed away.If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,have it transported on a transporter or trailer.The automatic transmission must be in positionN when the vehicle is being towed.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Rcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

In the event of damage to the electrical sys-temIf the battery is defective, the automatic trans-mission will be locked in position P. To shift theautomatic transmission to position N, you mustprovide power to the vehicle's electrical systemin the same way as when jump-starting(Y page 285).Have the vehicle transported on a transporter ortrailer.Disarm the automatic locking feature before thevehicle is towed (Y page 82). You could other-wise be locked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipemay be very hot. There isa risk of burns when removing the rear cover.Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particularcare when removing the rear cover.

All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Mercedes-AMG vehiclesThe brackets for the screw-in towing eye arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the front andat the rear, behind the covers.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit (Y page 277).

X Pull cover: out of the bumper in the direc-tion of the arrow by inserting your fingers intothe recess.

X Press the mark on cover; inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Remove cover; from the opening.X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as itwill go and tighten it.

288 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Position cover: on top of the bumper andpress it in at the bottom until it engages.

X Attach cover; to the bumper and press untilit engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 287).The automatic transmission automatically shiftsto positionPwhen you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the Smart-Key from the ignition lock. In order to ensurethat the automatic transmission stays in posi-tion N when towing the vehicle, you mustobserve the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the Smart-Key instead of the Start/Stop button(Y page 124).

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 107).

X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combination switchas usual. In this case, only the turn signals forthe desired direction flash. After resetting thecombination switch, the hazard warning lampstarts flashing again.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be towed with the rear axle raised. Thevehicle/trailer combination may otherwiseswerve or even roll over.

Transporting the vehicle

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto-matic transmission

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, thefront and rear axlesmust be stationary and onthe same transportation vehicle. Positioningover the connection point of the transportvehicle is not permitted. The drive train mayotherwise be damaged.

All vehicles! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-poses.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

Towing and tow-starting 289

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignitionlock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

If the vehicle has transmission damage or dam-age to the front or rear axle, have it transportedon a transporter or trailer.In the event of damage to the electrical sys-temIf the battery is defective, the automatic trans-mission will be locked in position P. To shift theautomatic transmission to position N, you mustprovide power to the vehicle's electrical systemin the same way as when jump-starting(Y page 285).Have the vehicle transported on a transporter ortrailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be started by tow-starting. This could oth-erwise damage the transmission.i You can find information on "Jump-starting"under (Y page 285).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.

Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of thesame rating, which you can recognize by thecolor and value. The fuse ratings are listed in thefuse allocation chart.The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicletool kit in the stowage compartment under thetrunk floor (Y page 277).If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified special-ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

! Only use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and which have thecorrect fuse rating for the system concerned.Otherwise, components or systems could bedamaged.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.

Before changing a fusePay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 290).X Switch off the engine.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off(Y page 123).

orX When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKeyto position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 123).

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 141).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

290 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed inthe direction of travelRFuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side ofthe vehicle, when viewed in the direction oftravel

Fuse box in the engine compartmentPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 290).

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Open the hood (Y page 265).X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture fromthe fuse box.

X To open: take lines: out of the guides.X Move lines: to one side.X Open retaining clamps;.X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.X To close: check whether the seal is lying cor-rectly in the cover.

X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box intothe retainer.

X Fold down the cover and close clamps;.X Secure lines: in the guides.X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunkPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 290).

X Open the trunk lid.X To open: release cover: at the top right andleft-hand sides with a flat object.

X Open cover: downwards in the direction ofthe arrow.

Fuses 291

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair the operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and ask about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendations

Further information regarding wheels and tirescan be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"(Y page 317).You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel-tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Information on tire pressure can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 302)Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 139)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 295)

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-ing to one side. This may indicate that thewheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect thata tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage. Hiddentire damage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no signs ofdamage, have the tires and wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetires do not get deformed by the curb or otherobstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuseangle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheelsor tires.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Checkwheels and tires for damage at least oncea month. Check wheels and tires after driving

292 OperationWheelsandtires

off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheelscan cause a loss of tire pressure.Pay particular attention to damage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpunctures in the tiresRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole width ofthe tire (Y page 293). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protect thevalve against dirt and moisture. Do not mountanything onto the valve other than the standardvalve cap or other valve caps approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use anyother valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressuremonitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-sure as necessary (Y page 295).Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 317).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.

Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tiretread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.They are visible once a tread depth of approx-imatelyá in (1.6mm) has been reached. If thisis the case, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same typeand make.Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 278).ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto thewheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for thefirst 60 miles (100 km). They only reach theirfull performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear.

Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 317).

Operation 293

Wheelsandtires

Z

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure loss warningsystem or with an active tire pressure monitorand on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with aflat tire (Y page 278).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 312).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehicleto M+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause cracks to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility forthis type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7†), use wintertires or all-season tires. Both types of tire areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking providethe best possible grip in wintry road conditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety systemssuch as ABS and ESP® to function optimally inwinter. These tires have been developed specif-ically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on allwheels to maintain safe handling characteris-tics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 298).X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-sure loss warning system (Y page 299).

X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 302).

Information about driving with an emergencyspare wheel (Y page 317).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.

294 Winter operationWheelsandtires

To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! On vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must driveat raised vehicle level if snow chains havebeen mounted. The vehicle may otherwise bedamaged.

! Onsome tire sizes there is not enough spacefor snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehi-cle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire com-binations" section under "Tires and wheels".

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains that havebeen specially approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality. For more information, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.If you intend to mount snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 317).ROnly use snow chains when driving on roadscompletely covered by snow. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snowchains. Observe the appropriate regulations ifyou wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 31 mph (50 km/h).

i Youmay wish to deactivate ESP® when pull-ing away with snow chains installed:RAll vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG vehi-cles) (Y page 70)RMercedes-AMG vehicles: (Y page 71)You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in acontrolled manner, achieving an increaseddriving force (cutting action).

Information about driving with an emergencyspare wheel (Y page 317).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard and tire pressure table shown here areexamples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-cle-specific and may deviate from the datashown here. The tire pressure specificationsthat are valid for your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with an emergency spare wheel:information on operation with an emergencyspare wheel can be found in the general notes inthe "Emergency spare wheel" section(Y page 318).Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure 295

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 302).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires. The recommended tire pressures are validfor the maximum permissible load and up to themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuelfiller flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tirespermitted at the factory for this vehicle; seeillustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-lowing tire pressure information is only valid forthat tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fullyladen" are defined in the table for different num-bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. Theactual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can befound on the tire sidewall (Y page 307).If the tire pressures have been set to the lowervalues for lighter loads and/or lower roadspeeds, the pressures should be reset to thehigher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speedsThe tire pressures for increased loads and/orhigher road speeds, shown in the tire pressuretable, may have a negative effect on drivingcomfort.If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this canlead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-den loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

296 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tirepressure. The outer appearance of a tire doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about the tirepressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressurecan be checked in the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is dependenton the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on theoutside temperature, the vehicle speed and thetire load. If the tire temperature changes by18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into account when checking the pressure ofwarm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is

too low for the current operating conditions. Ifyou check the tire pressure when the tires arewarm, the resulting value will be higher than ifthe tires were cold. This is normal. Do notreduce the tire pressure to the value specifiedfor cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwisebe too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap(Y page 139)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Tire pressure 297

Wheelsandtires

Z

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the recom-mended tire pressure for your vehicle whenadjusting the tire pressure (Y page 295).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 295).Information on air pressure for the tires on yourvehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillarRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 139)Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pressure,proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to bechecked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to therecommended value on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure table(Y page 295).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tirepressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. Todo so, press down the metal pin in the valve,using the tip of a pen for example. Then checkthe tire pressure again using the tire pressurechecker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressureloss warning system monitors the set tire pres-sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.This enables the system to detect significantpressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation ofa wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,a corresponding warningmessage will appear inthe multifunction display.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarningby the Run Flat Indicator Active Press'OK' to Restart message which appears inthe Serv. menu of the multifunction display.Information on the message display can befound in the "Restarting the tire pressure losswarning system" section (Y page 299).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does not warnyou of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 295).The tire pressure loss warning does not replacethe need to regularly check the tire pressure. Aneven loss of pressure on several tires at the

298 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

same time cannot be detected by the tire pres-sure loss warning system.The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner-ing at high speeds or driving with high rates ofacceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi-cle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning system ifyou have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tires forthe respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side. Addition-ally, a tire pressure table is attached to thefuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warningsystem can only give reliable warnings if youhave set the correct tire pressure. If an incor-rect tire pressure is set, these incorrect val-ues will be monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 295).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 123).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button on the steeringwheel to select the Tire Pressure menu.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator Active Press'OK' to Restart message appears in themultifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to select Yes.X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After a teach-in period, the tire pressure losswarning system will monitor the set tire pres-sures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX When the Tire Pressure Now OK?messageappears, press the9 or: button toselect Cancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tirepressures in all four tires. The tire pressuremon-itor warns you if the pressure drops in one ormore of the tires. The tire pressure monitor onlyfunctions if the corresponding sensors areinstalled in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed in themultifunction display. After a few minutes ofdriving, the current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the Servicemenu of themultifunctiondisplay, see illustration (example).

Tire pressure 299

Wheelsandtires

Z

For information on the message display, refer tothe "Checking the tire pressure electronically"section (Y page 301).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunderinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-sure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the warning lampwill flash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-minated, the systemmay not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of incom-patible replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate Tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 295). Note that the correct tire pressurefor the current operating situation must first betaught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there isa substantial loss of pressure, the warningthreshold for the warning message is aligned tothe reference values taught-in. Restart the tirepressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure ofthe cold tires (Y page 302). The current pres-sures are saved as new reference values. As aresult, a warning message will appear if the tirepressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn you ofan incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe thenotes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 295).The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.

300 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warninglamp in the instrument cluster for indicatingpressure loss or a malfunction. Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tirepressure on one or more tires is significantlytoo low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-functioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Observethe information on display messages(Y page 221).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunctionof the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-sure warning lamp flashing for approximatelyone minute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. Thetire pressures shown by the on-board computerrefer to those measured at sea level. At highaltitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by apressure gauge are higher than those shown bythe on-board computer. In this case, do notreduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radio transmit-ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-wayradios) thatmay be being operated in or near thevehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 123).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Service menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire is shownin the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressures will bedisplayed after driving a few minutesmessage appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-itor automatically detects new wheels or newsensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tirepressure value to the individual wheels is notpossible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activedisplay message is shown instead of the tirepressure display. The tire pressures are alreadybeing monitored.If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, thesystem may continue to show the tire pressureof the wheel that has been removed for a fewminutes. If this occurs, note that the value dis-played for the position where the spare wheel ismounted is not the same as the current tirepressure of the emergency spare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning message isshown in the multifunction display. The yellowtire pressure warning lamp then lights up.RIf the Correct Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in at least one tire is too low. The tirepressure must be corrected when the oppor-tunity arises.RIf the Check Tires message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in oneor more tires has dropped significantly. Thetires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire Malfunctionmessageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in one or more tires is dropping sud-denly. The tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in thedisplay messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 221).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,the tire pressures may be displayed for thewrong positions for a short time. This is rectifiedafter a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Tire pressure 301

Wheelsandtires

Z

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and thewarning lamps go out. Themonitor uses the cur-rently set tire pressures as the reference valuesfor monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressuremonitor will automatically detect the new refer-ence values after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also define refer-ence valuesmanually as described here. The tirepressure monitor then monitors the new tirepressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-ded for the corresponding driving situation onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's side B-pillar (Y page 295).You can find more tire pressure values forvarious operating conditions in the tire pres-sure table inside the fuel filler flap(Y page 295).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct onall four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Service menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the currenttire pressure for the individual tires or theTire pressures will be displayedafter driving a few minutes message.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐erence Valuesmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressures arewithin the specified range. The new tire pres-sures are then accepted as reference valuesand monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show themaximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tireand Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occu-pants and themaximumpermissible vehicleload. It also contains details of the tire sizesand corresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-tification plate informs you of the grossvehicle weight rating. It is made up of thevehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, thefuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-mation about the maximum gross axleweight rating on the front and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle). Never exceedthe maximum load or the maximum grossaxle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

302 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combinedweight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, loadand luggage must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specificand may differ from that in the illustration.You can find the valid maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle onthe Tire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown.The number of seats in your vehicle can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-suant to the "National Traffic and Motor VehicleSafety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

Loading the vehicle 303

Wheelsandtires

Z

able cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-

cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacity cal-culated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varyingseating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure you are using the actual loadlimit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 302).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people inthe vehicle (driver andoccupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

304 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load (maxi-mum gross vehicleweight rating from theTire and Loading Infor-mation placard minusthe gross weight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargo care-fully, you should still make sure that the grossvehicle weight rating and the gross axle weightrating are not exceeded. Details can be found onthe vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 302).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-mum permissible weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed themaximum permissible values (gross vehicleweight and maximum gross axle weight rating),have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.government specifications. Their purpose is toprovide drivers with uniform reliable informationon tire performance data. Tire manufacturershave to grade tires using three performance fac-tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and= temperature grade. These regulations do notapply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold inNorth America are provided with the corre-sponding quality grading markings on the side-wall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applicable,on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: A

All about wheels and tires 305

Wheelsandtires

Z

All passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat-utory safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified U.S.government course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half times as wellon the government course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practicesand differences in road characteristics and cli-mate.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage tothe drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-ured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfaces.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum treaddepth ofã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.Observe the legally required minimum tire treaddepth (Y page 293). Winter tires can reduce thebraking distance on snow-covered surfaces incomparison with summer tires. The braking dis-tance is still much further than on surfaces that

are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-priate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)(Y page 294).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

306 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards(Y page 310)

; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi-cation Number (Y page 309)

= Maximum load rating (Y page 309)? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 298)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 310)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 307)D Load index (Y page 309)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe the

tire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wall maynot contain any letters or may contain one letterthat precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-ufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: these arelight truck tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressure thatare only designed for temporary use in an emer-gency.Tire width:tire width: shows the nominal tirewidth in millimeters.Aspect ratio: aspect ratio; is the size ratiobetween the tire height and tire width and isshown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculatedby dividing the tire width by the tire height.Tire code:tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameterof the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim

All about wheels and tires 307

Wheelsandtires

Z

flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is anumerical code that specifies the maximumload-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 302).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.For further information on the maximum tireload in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 309).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 309).Speed rating:speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in

the size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).RIf a service specification is available, the max-imum speed is limited according to the speedrating in the service specification. Example:245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" isthe service specification. The letter "Y" rep-resents the speed rating. The maximumspeed of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).If the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifications,ask the tire manufacturer in order to find outthe maximum speed.RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR",and the service specifica-tion must be given in parentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-cates that the maximum speed of the tire isover 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-ufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+Smarking, winter tires alsohave thei snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association ofCanada (RAC) regarding the tire traction onsnow. They have been especially developedfor driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-cle from exceeding the following speeds:Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles): 130 mph(210 km/h)RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)RAMG vehicles with Performance Package:186 mph (300 km/h)

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

308 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factorymay be higher than themaximum speed that theelectronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 317).Further information about reading tire data canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex:may be imprinted after the letters thatidentify speed indexB on the sidewall of thetire (Y page 307).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standard load(SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that dependson themaximum load that the tire can carry ata certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 302).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-ufacturer or retreadermust imprint a TIN in or onthe sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retreadersto inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? andmanufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol:marks that the tire complies with the

All about wheels and tires 309

Wheelsandtires

Z

requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation.Manufacturer identification code: manufac-turer identification code; provides details onthe tire manufacturer. New tires have a codewith two symbols. Retreaded tires have a codewith four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 317).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be used bythe manufacturer as a code to describe specificcharacteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureAprovides information about the age of a tire. Thefirst and second positions represent the week ofmanufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-endar week. Positions three and four representthe year of manufacture. For example, a tire thatis marked "2614" wasmanufactured in week 26in 2014.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cordand the number of layers in sidewall: andunder tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire treadand sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of theU S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehicleis designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction andtemperature characteristics. The quality grad-ing assessment is made by the manufacturerfollowing specifications from the U.S. govern-ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall ofthe tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies to thetires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-mum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installed onthe vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. The grossaxle weight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

310 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identification.It specifies the speed range for which the tire isapproved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weight ofthe vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel,accessories installed, occupants, luggage andthe drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The grossvehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable). The gross vehicle weight rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure isbar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacitymore precisely.

Curb weightTheweight of a vehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-tem and optional equipment if these are instal-led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-gers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximum permis-sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire isapproved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculated bydividing the maximum axle load of one axle bytwo.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tire widthin percent.

tire pressurePressure inside the tire applying an outwardforce to every square inch of the tire's surface.The tire pressure is specified in pounds persquare inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.The tire pressure should only be corrected whenthe tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contact withthe road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sits securelyon thewheel. There are several steel wires in thebead to prevent the tire from coming loose fromthe wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

All about wheels and tires 311

Wheelsandtires

Z

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-formance battery, are not included in the curbweight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be used bya tire manufacturer to identify tires, for examplefor a product recall, and thus identify the pur-chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-er's identity code, tire size, tire type code andthe manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is a codethat contains the maximum load bearing capa-city of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between the tiresand the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is levelwith the bars, the wear limit ofá in (1.6 mm)has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle at theirdesignated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 278) contains information and notes onhow to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flattire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" (Y page 278).Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in theevent of a flat tire, the emergency spare wheel is

mounted as described under "Mounting awheel" (Y page 313).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rear wheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 313).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tires inthe center.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer'swarranty book in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this maybe required earlier. Do not change the directionof wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,restart the tire pressure loss warning system(Y page 299) or the tire pressure monitor(Y page 302).

312 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-planing. These advantages can only be gained ifthe tires are installed corresponding to thedirection of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tiresfrom oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the parking brake.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-aheadposition.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "nor-mal" level is selected (Y page 159).

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock (Y page 123).

X If included in the vehicle equipment, removethe tire-change tool kit from the vehicle(Y page 277).

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, itcan be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 277).The folding wheel chock is an additional safetymeasure to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway, for example when changing a wheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into theopenings in base plate=.

X Place chocks or other suitable items underthe front and rear of the wheel that is diago-nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack

Changing a wheel 313

Wheelsandtires

Z

must be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jackingup the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-wise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising the vehicle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-cific jack that has been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold thevehicle for a short time while a wheel is beingchanged. It must not be used for performingmaintenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-ing away by applying the parking brake andinserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,flat, load-bearing underlaymust be used. On aslippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill notbe able to achieve its load-bearing capacitydue to the restricted height.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground does notexceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in thevehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with alloywheels and hub caps: thewheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before youcan unscrew the wheel bolts, you must removethe hub cap.

X To remove: take socket; and lug wrench= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 277).

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Position lug wrench= on socket;.X Using lug wrench=, turn hub cap: coun-ter-clockwise and remove it.

X To install: before installing, check hub cap:and the wheel area for soiling and clean ifnecessary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it is inthe right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; andtighten hub cap:.The tightening torque must be18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

i Note that the hub cap should be tightenedto the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe hub cap installed at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Using lug wrench=, loosen the bolts on thewheel you wish to change by about one fullturn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

314 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Jacking points

X Position jackA at jacking point?.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn crankB clockwise until jackA sitscompletely on jacking point?. The base ofthe jack must lie evenly on the ground.

X Turn crankB until the tire is raised a maxi-mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.

Removing a wheel! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-brake disc: during removal and repositioningof the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the

ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore,you should proceed carefully and get a sec-ond person assist to you. Alternatively, youcan use a second alignment bolt.

! Donot placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirtysurface. The bolt andwheel hub threads couldotherwise be damaged when you screw themin.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Changing a wheel 315

Wheelsandtires

Z

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section(Y page 312).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respectivewheel.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-brake disc: during removal and repositioningof the wheel, the wheel rim can strike theceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore,you should proceed carefully and get a sec-ond person assist to you. Alternatively, youcan use a second alignment bolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-ment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

X Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel:inflate the collapsible spare wheel(Y page 319).Only then lower the vehicle.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

! Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel:before lowering the vehicle, inflate the col-lapsible spare wheel with the tire inflationcompressor. The wheel rim could otherwisebe damaged.

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwiseuntil the vehicle is once again standing firmlyon the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswisepattern in the sequence indicated (: toA).The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft(130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle toolsin the trunk again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly mountedwheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 295).

When you are driving with the collapsible sparewheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warningsystemor the tire pressuremonitor cannot func-tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure losswarning system or tire pressure monitor whenthe defective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.

316 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-tem: all installed wheels must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel-tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tires and wheelswhich have been approved byMercedes-Benzspecifically for your vehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABS orESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires mayonly be used on wheels that have been spe-cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certaincharacteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noiseemissions or fuel consumption, may other-wise be adversely affected. In addition, whendriving with a load, tire dimension variationscould cause the tires to come into contactwith the bodywork and axle components. Thiscould result in damage to the tires or the vehi-cle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from the use of tires, wheels oraccessories other than those tested andapproved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benzcannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreadedtires are mounted. Do not mount used tires ifyou have no information about their previoususage.

The recommended pressures for various oper-ating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tire pres-sures under various operating conditions(Y page 295).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the maintenancerecommendations of the tire manufacturer inthe vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equipthe vehicle with:Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (leftand right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summertires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 278).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Emergency spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire type ofthe spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.

Emergency spare wheel 317

Wheelsandtires

Z

Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel or sparewheel of a different size, you must not exceedthe maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-gency spare wheels.

General notesYou can ask for information regarding permittedemergency spare wheels at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.You should regularly check the pressure of theemergency spare wheel, particularly prior tolong trips, and correct the pressure as neces-sary (Y page 295). The value on the wheel isvalid.An emergency spare wheel may also be moun-ted against the direction of rotation. Observethe time restriction on use as well as the speedlimitation specified on the emergency sparewheel.Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.

i When you are driving with the collapsiblespare wheel mounted, the tire pressure losswarning system or the tire pressure monitorcannot function reliably. Only restart the tirepressure loss warning system or tire pressuremonitor when the defective wheel has beenreplaced with a new wheel.Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: aftermounting an emergency spare wheel, the sys-tem may still display the tire pressure of theremoved wheel for a few minutes. The valuedisplayed for the mounted emergency sparewheel is not the same as the current tire pres-sure of the emergency spare wheel.

"Minispare" emergency sparewheel/collapsible spare wheel

Opening the stowage well

The emergency spare wheel can be found in thestowage well under the trunk floor.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 247).X Remove stowage space:.

Removing the "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel

X Turn stowage well; counter-clockwise andremove it together with vehicle tool kittray:.

X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel=.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 313).

318 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

Removing the collapsible spare wheel(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The emergency spare wheel can be found in thestowage well under the trunk floor.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 247).X Reach into cutout: in the tool holder and liftit up.

X Remove collapsible spare wheel;.Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 313).

Stowing a used collapsible sparewheel! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in thevehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisturemay get into the vehicle.

Take the following steps to stow a used collaps-ible sparewheel. Otherwise, it will not fit into thespare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you have this work performed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew thevalve insert from the valve and release the air.i Fully deflating the tires can take a fewminutes.

X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.X Screw the valve cap back on.X Remove the protective sheet from the vehicletool kit and pull it over the collapsible sparewheel.

X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the emer-gency spare wheel well under the trunk.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using thetire inflation compressor before lowering thevehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise bedamaged.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressorfor longer than eightminutes at a timewithouta break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be operatedagain once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety instruc-tions on the tire inflation compressor label andon the tire sealant bottle.X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as descri-bed (Y page 313).The collapsible spare wheel must bemountedbefore it is inflated.

X Remove the tire inflation compressor fromthe stowage space under the trunk floor(Y page 277).

X Pull connector? and the hose out of thehousing.

X Remove the cap from the valve on the col-lapsible spare wheel.

X Screwunion nut: of the hose onto the valve.X Make sure on/off switchA of the tire infla-tion compressor is set to 0.

X Insert connector? into a 12 V socket(Y page 253) in your vehicle.

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 123).

X Press on/off switchA on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switched on.The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shownon pressure gauge=.

X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure.

Emergency spare wheel 319

Wheelsandtires

Z

The specified tire pressure is printed on theyellow label of the emergency spare wheel.

X When the specified tire pressure has beenreached, press on/off switchA on the elec-tric air pump to 0.The tire inflation compressor is switched off.

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock.

X If the tire pressure is higher than the specifiedpressure, press pressure release valve but-ton; until the correct tire pressure has beenreached.

X Unscrew air hose union nut: from the valve.X Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsi-ble spare wheel again.

X Stow connector? and the hose in the lowersection of the tire inflation compressor.

X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehi-cle.

320 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Installing two-way radios and mobilephones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use of RFtransmitters are not observed.

In particular, the following conditionsmust becomplied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Robserve the maximum permissible outputin these wavebands.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and the healthof others. Using an exterior antenna takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may resultfrom electromagnetic fields.The following antenna positions may be used ifRF transmitters have been properly installed:

Approved antenna positions: Front roof area; Rear roof area= Rear fender? Trunk lidWhen installing an antenna on the front roofarea of vehicles with a sliding sunroof, observethe sweeping range of the roof.On the rear fenders, it is recommended to posi-tion the antenna on the side of the vehicle clos-est to the center of the road.Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609when retrofitting RF transmitters (RoadVehicles- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarketradio frequency transmitting equipment).Observe the legal requirements for accessoryparts.If your vehicle has installations for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply or antennaconnections intended for use with the basic wir-ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-plement when installing.

Vehicle electronics 321

Technicaldata

Z

Deviations with respect to frequency bands,maximum transmission outputs or antennapositions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at thebase of the antenna must not exceed the fol-lowing values:

Frequency band Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio system/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle withoutrestrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmitter frequenciesin the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-mum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio/Tetra)RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)There is no restriction for antenna positions onthe outside of the vehicle for the following fre-quency bands:RTrunked radio system/TetraR70 cm wavebandR2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the front left-hand door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only): VIN; Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only): VIN; Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identificationplate is used only as an example. This data isdifferent for every vehicle and can deviate

322 Identification platesTechnicaldata

from the data shown here. You can find thedata applicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmostposition.

X Fold floor covering: upwards.You will see VIN;.

The VIN can also be found in the following loca-tions:Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 323)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 322)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate, includ-ing the certification of both federal and Cali-fornian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must match.Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use ofproducts which have not been recommended isnot covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty orgoodwill gestures. They are listed in thisMercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appro-priate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCenter or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approved byMercedes-Benz by the following inscription onthe containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Service products and filling capacities 323

Technicaldata

Z

Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacityMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Total capa-city

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles

All other models 21.1 US gal(80.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles

All other models Approx.2.4 US gal(9.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium gradegasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operatingthe vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-age to the fuel system, engine and exhaustsystem.

! Do not use the following:RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)

324 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailableand you have to refuel with unleaded gasolineof a lower grade, observe the following pre-cautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regularunleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon aspossible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the labelon the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i For further information, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

As a temporary measure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoiddriving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI.Information on refueling (Y page 139).

CLS 400, CLS 400 4MATICi In some countries, the available gasolinemay not be sufficiently low in sulfur. This fuelcan temporarily produce unpleasant odors,especially on short journeys. As soon as sul-fur-free fuel (sulfur content < 10 ppm) is usedfor refueling, the odors are reduced.

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Do notmix fuel additives with fuel. This does notinclude additives for the removal and preven-tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only bemixed with additives recommended byMercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructionsfor use on the product label.More informationabout recommended additives can be

obtained from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-ded fuels that have additives.The fuel quality available in some countries maynot be sufficient. Residue could build up in thefuel injection system as a result. In such cases,and in consultation with an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixedwith the cleaning additive recommended byMercedes-Benz. You must observe the notesand mixing ratios specified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-ification other than is necessary to fulfill theprescribed service intervals. Do not changethe engine oil or oil filter in order to achievelonger replacement intervals than those pre-scribed. You could otherwise cause enginedamage or damage to the exhaust gas after-treatment.Follow the instructions in the service intervaldisplay regarding the oil change. Otherwise,you may damage the engine and the exhaustgas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the importantsafety notes on service products (Y page 323).The engine oils are matched to the performanceofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.You should therefore only use engine oils and oilfilters that are approved for vehicles with main-tenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Service products and filling capacities 325

Technicaldata

Z

The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe orMB-Approval

All models 229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor Mercedes‑AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-ers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

CLS 400CLS 400 4MATIC

6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

CLS 550CLS 550 4MATIC

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-vice products when handling brake fluid(Y page 323).The brake fluid change intervals can be found inthe Maintenance Booklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid can beobtained at any qualified specialist workshop oron the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can be foundin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, evenin countries where high temperatures prevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-vice products when handling coolant(Y page 323).

326 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-lowing tasks:RAnti-corrosion protectionRAntifreeze protectionRRaising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection down to-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolantduring operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection downto -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not bedissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordancewith MB Specifications for Service Products310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filledwith a coolant mixture that ensures adequateantifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

i The coolant is checked with every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

CLS 400CLS 400 4MATIC

Approx. 10.9 US qt(10.3 l)

CLS 550CLS 550 4MATIC

Approx. 11.5 US qt(10.9 l)

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

Approx. 11.4 US qt(10.8 l)

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-

nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMBWinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 323).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid allyear round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle is fil-led with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oilapproved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.The approved PAG oil may not be mixed withany other PAG oil that is not approved forR-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climatecontrol system may be damaged.

Service products and filling capacities 327

Technicaldata

Z

Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant orreplacing component parts, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,must be adhered to.Always have work on the climate control systemcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol: advises you about:RPossible dangersRHaving service work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop

Filling capacities

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

Capacity

Refrigerant 22.6 ± 0.4 oz(640 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

All other models Capacity

Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz(590 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicle data:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:

- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Model : Opening height

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

71.1 in(1805 mm)

CLS 400CLS 400 4MATIC

70.5 in(1790 mm)

CLS 550CLS 550 4MATIC

70.3 in(1786 mm)

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

Vehicle length 195.6 in (4967 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

81.7 in (2075 mm)

Vehicle height 56.3 in (1431 mm)

Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874 mm)

Turning radius 36.9 ft (11.25 m)

328 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

All other models

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

81.7 in (2075 mm)

Vehicle height 55.8 in (1418 mm)

Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874 mm)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

Model Vehicle length

CLS 400CLS 400 4MATIC

194.4 in (4937 mm)

CLS 550CLS 550 4MATIC

195.0 in (4952 mm)

Model Turning radius

CLS 400 36.7 ft (11.18 m)

CLS 400 4MATIC 37.8 ft (11.51 m)

CLS 550 36.8 ft (11.21 m)

CLS 550 4MATIC 37.8 ft (11.53 m)

Vehicle data 329

Technicaldata

Z

330

331

332